WO2020108331A1 - Dental braces model determination method and apparatus, computer device and storage medium - Google Patents

Dental braces model determination method and apparatus, computer device and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020108331A1
WO2020108331A1 PCT/CN2019/118954 CN2019118954W WO2020108331A1 WO 2020108331 A1 WO2020108331 A1 WO 2020108331A1 CN 2019118954 W CN2019118954 W CN 2019118954W WO 2020108331 A1 WO2020108331 A1 WO 2020108331A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
correction
tooth
teeth
sna
snb
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/118954
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
沈琼茂
董昱彦
吴宏恩
Original Assignee
深圳市深蓝牙医疗科技有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 深圳市深蓝牙医疗科技有限公司 filed Critical 深圳市深蓝牙医疗科技有限公司
Publication of WO2020108331A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020108331A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T17/00—Three dimensional [3D] modelling, e.g. data description of 3D objects
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61C—DENTISTRY; APPARATUS OR METHODS FOR ORAL OR DENTAL HYGIENE
    • A61C7/00—Orthodontics, i.e. obtaining or maintaining the desired position of teeth, e.g. by straightening, evening, regulating, separating, or by correcting malocclusions
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61C—DENTISTRY; APPARATUS OR METHODS FOR ORAL OR DENTAL HYGIENE
    • A61C7/00—Orthodontics, i.e. obtaining or maintaining the desired position of teeth, e.g. by straightening, evening, regulating, separating, or by correcting malocclusions
    • A61C7/002—Orthodontic computer assisted systems
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06N—COMPUTING ARRANGEMENTS BASED ON SPECIFIC COMPUTATIONAL MODELS
    • G06N3/00—Computing arrangements based on biological models
    • G06N3/02—Neural networks
    • G06N3/08—Learning methods
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T2207/00—Indexing scheme for image analysis or image enhancement
    • G06T2207/30—Subject of image; Context of image processing
    • G06T2207/30004—Biomedical image processing
    • G06T2207/30036—Dental; Teeth

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of computer technology, and in particular to a method, device, computer equipment, and storage medium for determining a dental appliance model.
  • Orthodontics is widely used by people as a common method of orthodontics.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a dental appliance model, the method includes:
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device for determining a dental appliance model, the device includes: an acquisition module and a first processing module; the acquisition module is used to acquire an oral scan file of a tooth to be corrected; the first A processing module is used to determine the orthodontic information according to the oral scan file, and determine the orthodontic model based on the orthodontic information, the orthodontic information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the orthodontic goal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer device, including a memory and a processor, where the memory stores a computer program, and when the processor executes the computer program, the following steps are implemented:
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the following steps are implemented:
  • the method, device, computer equipment and storage medium for determining the above-mentioned orthodontic model by obtaining the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected; according to the oral scan file, determine the dental correction information, which is used to characterize that the tooth meets the correction goal
  • determine the orthodontic model which can be achieved by the computer equipment according to the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected, automatically determine the orthodontic information that meets the orthodontic goal, and automatically based on the tooth that meets the orthodontic goal
  • the correction information generates the dental brace model, thus avoiding the problems of low work efficiency caused by manually using computer software to determine the dental brace model, and the low accuracy of the model caused by insufficient personnel experience, which greatly improves the dental brace
  • the determination efficiency of the model is extremely effective in saving working time, and greatly improves the accuracy of the determined orthodontic model, thereby enhancing the effect of orthodontics.
  • FIG. 1 is an internal structure diagram of a computer device provided by an embodiment
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by an embodiment
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment
  • FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of the state of the teeth before correction provided by an embodiment
  • 6b is a schematic diagram of a target correction form provided by an embodiment
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment
  • FIG. 8a is a schematic diagram of an E-plane exceeding the standard in an embodiment
  • FIG. 8b is a schematic diagram of an E-plane under normal conditions in an embodiment
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a dental appliance model provided by an embodiment.
  • the method for determining the orthodontic model provided by the present application can be applied to the computer device shown in FIG. 1, and the computer device includes a processor, a memory, a network interface, a display screen, and an input device connected through a system bus.
  • the processor of the computer device is used to provide computing and control capabilities.
  • the memory of the computer device includes a non-volatile storage medium and an internal memory.
  • the non-volatile storage medium stores an operating system, a computer program, and a database.
  • the internal memory provides an environment for the operating system and computer programs in the non-volatile storage medium.
  • the database of the computer device is used to store the oral scan files involved in the following embodiments, and optionally, a preset tissue identification model, a first correction model, a second correction model, and a preset SNA correction Model, preset congestion level correction model, preset E-plane correction model, correction rule, first sorting rule, second sorting rule, third sorting rule, fourth sorting rule and fifth sorting rule
  • the description of the models and rules can refer to the content of the following method embodiments.
  • the network interface of the computer device can be used to communicate with other external devices through a network connection.
  • the computer device may be a server, a PC, a personal digital assistant, or other terminal devices, such as a PAD, a mobile phone, etc., or a cloud or a remote server.
  • the specific form of the equipment is not limited.
  • the display screen of the computer device may be a liquid crystal display screen or an electronic ink display screen
  • the input device of the computer device may be a touch layer covered on the display screen, or may be a button, a trackball or a touchpad provided on the computer device housing , Can also be an external keyboard, touchpad or mouse.
  • the input device and the display screen may not be part of the computer equipment, and may be external equipment of the computer equipment.
  • FIG. 1 is only a block diagram of a part of the structure related to the solution of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the computer device to which the solution of the present application is applied.
  • the specific computer device may It includes more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components are combined, or have a different component arrangement.
  • the method, device, computer equipment and storage medium for determining a dental appliance model used in the embodiments of the present application realize the automatic determination of a dental appliance model through a computer device, thereby improving the determination efficiency of the dental appliance model.
  • the execution subject of the following method embodiments may be a device for determining orthodontic models, and the device may be implemented as part or all of the above-mentioned computer equipment through software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the following method embodiments are described by taking an example where the execution subject is a computer device.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by an embodiment. This embodiment relates to the specific process of the computer device determining the dental appliance model according to the oral scan file of the teeth to be corrected. As shown in Figure 2, it includes:
  • the oral scan file may be a digital image of the oral cavity obtained by scanning the oral cavity of the patient, or a digital image of the oral cavity obtained by scanning the impression of the oral cavity of the patient.
  • the computer device can obtain oral scan files of the teeth to be corrected.
  • the computer device may scan the oral cavity of the object to be corrected to obtain a digital image of the oral cavity, and perform image synthesis on the digital image of the oral cavity to generate a panoramic image of the oral cavity of the tooth to be corrected, and then use the panoramic image of the oral cavity as a pending Oral scan files for correcting teeth.
  • the computer device can also obtain images of the oral tooth solid model of the tooth to be corrected, and synthesize a plurality of images of the oral tooth solid model to generate a panoramic image of the oral tooth solid model, and combine the oral teeth
  • the panoramic image of the solid model is used as the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected.
  • the computer device may also receive the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected sent by other devices, which is not limited in this embodiment, as long as the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected can be obtained.
  • S102 Determine dental correction information according to the oral scan file, and the dental correction information is used to characterize that the tooth meets the correction goal.
  • the computer device can automatically determine the tooth correction information according to the oral scan file, so that the corrected tooth can meet the correction goal, that is, meet the use requirements.
  • the dental correction information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the correction goal, such as the correction state information and the correction direction information.
  • the computer device inputs a plurality of oral scan training files into the neural network model for training to obtain a correction model, and uses the trained correction model to automatically determine the tooth correction information.
  • the computer device can also determine the tooth correction information according to the preset rules according to the distribution of the teeth, lip jaws and other tissues in the current oral scan file.
  • the computer device may also use a combination of neural network models and rules to determine the dental correction information, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • S103 Determine a dental appliance model based on the dental appliance information.
  • the computer device further determines the orthodontic model based on the determined orthodontic information.
  • the orthodontic model can include a single orthodontic model, or a set of orthodontic models composed of multiple orthodontic models.
  • the shape of the multiple orthodontic models can show a step change, which can achieve a gradient Orthodontics to the desired target state.
  • the determined orthodontic information is to move the anterior incisor 1 mm to the jaw side.
  • Each orthodontic model can move the anterior incisor 0.5 mm to the jaw side.
  • the second orthodontic model continues to move the anterior incisor to the jaw side by 0.5 mm to complete the anterior incisor to the jaw.
  • the lateral movement is 1 mm to achieve the purpose of orthodontics. Therefore, the determined orthodontic model is a set of orthodontic models composed of the first and second orthodontic models.
  • the computer device obtains the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected, and determines the dental correction information according to the oral scan file, so as to determine the dental appliance model based on the dental correction information.
  • the dental correction information is used to characterize the information that the teeth meet the correction goals.
  • the computer equipment can automatically determine the orthodontic information that meets the orthodontic goal based on the oral scan file of the tooth to be orthodontic, and automatically generate the orthodontic model based on the orthodontic information that meets the orthodontic goal, thus avoiding manual Manually using computer software to determine the problems of low work efficiency caused by the model of dental braces, and the inaccuracy of the model caused by inadequate personnel experience, which greatly improves the efficiency of determining the model of dental braces and saves work extremely effectively Time, and greatly improve the accuracy of the determined dental appliance model, and thus enhance the effect of teeth correction.
  • a possible implementation manner of the above S102 may include: according to the oral scan file, using a preset second correction model to determine the tooth correction information;
  • the second correction model is a model obtained by training a plurality of oral scan training files using a deep learning neural network system.
  • the computer device can input multiple oral scan training files, such as multiple STL training images, into the neural network model for training, use deep learning algorithms, and obtain the second corrected model after training, and scan the oral cavity
  • the file is input to the trained second correction model, so that the tooth correction information is automatically determined.
  • the above-mentioned oral scan file may also be input into a pre-trained second correction model, so as to automatically determine the tooth correction information. This embodiment is not limited.
  • the computer device can use the second correction model obtained by training multiple oral scan training files according to the oral scan file to determine the dental correction information, thereby automatically determining the dental correction information that meets the correction goal, which improves The determination efficiency of the dental appliance model is effectively saved, and the working time is effectively saved, and the accuracy of the dental appliance model is greatly improved.
  • FIG. 3 another possible implementation manner of the above S102 may be shown in FIG. 3, and may specifically include:
  • S201 Determine an oral tissue distribution model according to the oral scan file.
  • the computer device can determine the oral tissue distribution model by identifying the above oral scan files.
  • the oral tissue distribution model is a virtual model that uses a computer to characterize the tissue distribution in the oral cavity, which can characterize the teeth in the oral cavity, Distribution of tissues such as lips, jaws, cheeks and gums.
  • the computer device can also identify the above oral scan files through the identification rules set in advance, for example, the tissue boundary in the image is divided according to the pixel values in the image to determine the oral tissue distribution model;
  • the computer device can also receive the calibration of the tissue boundary in the oral scan file, so as to determine the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the specific manner in which the computer device determines the oral tissue distribution model based on the oral scan file is not limited.
  • the computer device may also use a preset oral tissue identification model to identify the above oral scan files to obtain an oral tissue distribution model.
  • the oral tissue recognition model is a model obtained by training a neural network system using deep learning, a plurality of oral scan training files for training and a model labeling oral tissue distribution.
  • the computer device can input a plurality of oral scan files that have been marked with tissue distribution, such as multiple STL training images, into a deep learning neural network model for training, and obtain a trained oral tissue recognition model.
  • the oral scan file is input to the trained oral tissue recognition model, thereby automatically determining the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the above-mentioned oral scan file may also be input to a pre-trained oral tissue distribution model to automatically determine dental correction information, which is not limited.
  • a preset oral tissue identification model is used to identify the above oral scan files to obtain an oral tissue distribution model, which determines the oral tissue distribution model with high accuracy and high determination efficiency.
  • S202 Determine tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the computer device can automatically determine the tooth correction information according to the above oral tissue distribution model.
  • a possible implementation manner of this step S202 may be: using a preset first correction model to identify the oral tissue distribution model to determine the tooth correction information, and the first correction model is adopted Deep learning neural network system, a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models.
  • the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models and the corrected target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models into the neural network model for training, and adopts the deep learning algorithm to obtain the training And then input the above oral tissue distribution model to the trained first correction model, so as to automatically determine the tooth correction information.
  • the above multiple oral tissue distribution models may also be input to the pre-trained first correction model to automatically determine the tooth correction information, which is not limited.
  • a first correction model is obtained by training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models and a corrected target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models, and the oral tissue distribution model
  • the processing is performed to automatically determine the tooth correction information, and the determined first correction model has high accuracy and high determination efficiency.
  • step S202 reference may also be made to FIG. 4 described below, and details are not described here.
  • the computer device determines the oral tissue distribution model based on the oral scan file, and determines the dental correction information based on the oral tissue distribution model, which can make the determined dental correction information and the oral scan file
  • the matching improves the accuracy of the orthodontic information, thereby making the determined orthodontic model more accurate.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to a specific process in which the computer device determines the dental correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model. As shown in FIG. 4, the above S202 may specifically include:
  • the correction method includes an upper alveolar seat angle (Sella-Nasion-Apoint, SNA) correction method, and a lower alveolar seat angle (Sella-Nasion-Bpoint, SNB) Correction method, crowding level correction method and E-plane correction method.
  • SNA upper alveolar seat angle
  • Sella-Nasion-Bpoint lower alveolar seat angle
  • the above SNA is the upper alveolar seat angle, which is used to characterize the posterior lower intersection angle formed by the line between the anterior skull base plane and the nose root point and the upper alveolar seat point;
  • the above SNB is the lower alveolar seat angle It is used to characterize the posterior inferior intersection angle formed by the plane of the anterior skull base and the line between the base of the nose and the base of the lower alveolar;
  • the computer device may determine whether the correction method with the corrected teeth is the SNA correction method, the SNB correction method, the crowding level correction method, or the E-plane correction method.
  • the computer device can also analyze the oral tissue distribution model, for example, analyze the SNA, SNB, crowding degree and E-plane position in the oral tissue sub-model, and compare with preset standards to determine the required The corrective method used. This embodiment is not limited.
  • S302 Determine the tooth correction information according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the computer device may determine the tooth correction information according to the above correction method and the above oral tissue distribution model.
  • the correction method is an SNA correction method
  • a predetermined SNA correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model
  • the SNA correction model is a neural network system using deep learning
  • SNA correction types include SNA severely too large, SNA generally too large, SNA a little too large, SNA a little severe, SNA generally too small, and SNA severely too small.
  • the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different SNA correction types into the neural network model for training, and uses a deep learning algorithm to use the target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models as nerves.
  • the ideal output of the network model is trained to obtain the SNA correction model after training, and then the above oral tissue distribution model is input to the trained SNA correction model, thereby automatically determining the tooth correction information.
  • the multiple oral tissue distribution models may be input to a pre-trained SNA correction model to automatically determine the tooth correction information, which is not limited.
  • the computer device uses multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNA correction types to train to obtain the SNA correction model, and then determines the tooth correction information. Because the accuracy of the SNA correction model is high, the determined tooth correction The information is more accurate and the determination efficiency is high.
  • the tooth correction information is determined using a preset SNB correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the SNB correction model is a neural network system using deep learning , A model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNB correction types.
  • SNB correction types include SNB severely too large, SNB generally too large, SNB a little too large, SNB a little severe, SNB generally too small, and SNB severely too small.
  • the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different SNB correction types into the neural network model for training, and uses a deep learning algorithm to use the target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models as nerves
  • the ideal output of the network model is trained to obtain the SNB correction model after training, and then the above oral tissue distribution model is input to the trained SNB correction model, thereby automatically determining the tooth correction information.
  • the training sample may be a labeled oral tissue distribution model.
  • the above multiple oral tissue distribution models may be input to a pre-trained SNB correction model to automatically determine tooth correction information, which is not limited.
  • the computer equipment adopts training on multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNB correction types to obtain the SNB correction model, and then determines the tooth correction information. Because the accuracy of the SNB correction model is high, the determined tooth correction The information is more accurate and the determination efficiency is high.
  • the correction method is a crowding level correction method
  • a preset crowding level correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model
  • the crowding level correction model is based on deep learning
  • the neural network system is a model obtained by training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different crowding correction types and a target dentition model corresponding to the plurality of oral tissue distribution training models.
  • the types of congestion correction include severe congestion, general congestion, a little congestion, a little separation, general separation and severe separation.
  • the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models and inputs a neural network model for training, and adopts a neural network algorithm to use a target dentition model corresponding to multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different crowding correction types as a neural network
  • the ideal output of the model is trained to obtain the crowded level correction model after training, and then the above oral tissue distribution model is input to the trained crowded level correction model, thereby automatically determining the tooth correction information.
  • the above multiple oral tissue distribution models may also be input to a pre-trained crowding level correction model to automatically determine tooth correction information, which is not limited.
  • multiple oral tissue distribution models with different crowding correction types are trained to obtain a crowding level correction model, and then dental correction information is determined. Since the accuracy of the crowding level correction model is high, the determined dental correction information More accurate and high efficiency.
  • the correction method is an E-plane correction method
  • a predetermined E-plane correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the E-plane correction model is adopted
  • the deep learning neural network system is a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions and a target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models.
  • the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions into a neural network model, and uses deep learning algorithms for training, corresponding to multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions
  • the target dentition model is used as the ideal output of the neural network model, trained to obtain the E-plane correction model after training, and then the above oral tissue distribution model is input to the trained E-plane correction model, thereby automatically determining the tooth correction information .
  • the above multiple oral tissue distribution models may also be input into a pre-trained E-plane correction model to automatically determine tooth correction information, which is not limited.
  • multiple oral tissue distribution models with different E-plane positions are trained to obtain the E-plane correction model, and then the tooth correction information is determined. Because the accuracy of the E-plane correction model is high, the determined The orthodontic information is more accurate and the determination efficiency is high.
  • step S302 includes: according to the determined correction method and oral tissue distribution model, using preset correction rules to determine tooth correction information, wherein the correction rules are used to characterize tooth correction The constraints that need to be met.
  • the computer device may use preset correction rules to arrange the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model so that the arranged teeth meet the correction goals, thereby determining the tooth correction information.
  • the computer equipment can determine the tooth correction information according to the above-mentioned correction rules to meet the needs of use, and further improve the determination efficiency.
  • the computer device can further determine the tooth correction information by determining the correction method of the tooth to be corrected, and according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model. Since the above correction methods include the SNA correction method, the SNB correction method, the crowding level correction method, and the E-plane correction method, the computer device can determine the matching tooth correction information according to different correction methods, thereby making the tooth correction information more accurate , To further improve the accuracy of the determined orthodontic model.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by yet another embodiment. This embodiment relates to when the correction method is the SNA correction method, the computer device uses a preset correction rule to determine the specific process of the tooth correction information according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the above S302 may specifically include:
  • S401 Determine the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected.
  • the computer device may obtain the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and determine the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected in the head-side slice by identifying the head-side slice.
  • the computer device may use an SNA recognition model to identify the above-mentioned head-side slices, where the SNA recognition model is a neural network model. This embodiment does not limit the manner in which the computer device determines the SNA according to the head side slice.
  • S402. Determine the SNA correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNA and the preset SNA threshold of the tooth to be corrected.
  • the computer device may compare the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected with a preset SNA threshold to determine the range of the initial SNA and further determine the SNA correction type.
  • the specific process of this step is as follows:
  • the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely excessive, wherein, the SNA The difference is the difference between the initial SNA and the average SNA.
  • the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA Generally too large.
  • the SNA correction type of the tooth is a little too large for SNA.
  • the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA a little too small.
  • the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA Generally too small.
  • the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely too small.
  • the above average value of SNA may be preset, which may be calculated according to multiple oral cavity models, or may be obtained based on industry experience, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the preset SNA threshold may include: a first SNA threshold, a second SNA threshold, a third SNA threshold, and a fourth SNA threshold, where the first SNA threshold is greater than the second SNA threshold, and the third SNA threshold is less than the fourth SNA Threshold.
  • the types of SNA corrections that can be obtained from this include SNA severely too large, SNA generally too large, SNA a little too large, SNA a little too small, SNA generally too small, and SNA severely too small.
  • the first SNA threshold may be 8 degrees
  • the second SNA threshold may be 2 degrees
  • the third SNA threshold may be 2 degrees
  • the fourth SNA threshold may be 8 degrees
  • the average SNA value may be 82 degree.
  • S403. Determine the dental correction information according to the SNA correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the computer device may determine the dental correction information according to the determined SNA correction type and according to the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the above-mentioned dental correction information may include a target correction form, and the target correction form is a form of an orthosis model that can satisfy the correction target.
  • the specific process regarding this step may include:
  • the preset number An arrangement rule arranging all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain dental correction information, wherein the first arrangement rule is used to characterize the constraint conditions for teeth to be arranged in the oral tissue distribution model, single
  • the lateral dental arch should have the total width of the teeth to be arranged on one side.
  • the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is the actual length of the dental arrangement on the unilateral dental arch.
  • the computer equipment should have a length based on the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch in the oral tissue distribution model, using a preset
  • the first arrangement rule is to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to determine the tooth correction information.
  • the above first arrangement rule can be used to characterize the constraint condition of teeth arrangement in the oral tissue distribution model, and the constraint condition may be one or a combination of multiple.
  • the unilateral dental arch mentioned above should have the total width of the teeth to be arranged on one side.
  • the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is the actual length of the dental arrangement that can be provided on the unilateral dental arch.
  • the above first arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNA value until the difference between the SNA value of the moved tooth and the SNA average value is less than the SNA threshold Fifth SNA threshold in; move the central incisor to the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and perpendicular to the E-Plane The distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; Moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occludes.
  • the first arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the central incisor toward the average SNA value, that is, when the SNA is greater than the average value of SNA, the central incisor is reduced toward SNA When the SNA is less than the average SNA, move the central incisor in the direction of increasing SNA. If the difference between the two is less than the fifth SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA of the tooth is considered to be close to the average SNA ; Move the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour on the E-plane.
  • E-plane is the line connecting the outer edge of the nose of the face and the outer edge of the chin
  • the side of the E-plane where the face is located is determined as the first One direction
  • the other side is determined as the second direction. If the part of the lip contour is in the second direction, move the central incisor until the lip contour is all in the first direction of the E-plane, and the outer edge of the lip contour If the vertical distance from E-Plane is less than the preset first distance threshold, then the tooth is not too protruding or too concave at this time, and it can meet the requirements; according to the midline, all teeth are carried out in sequence along the average arch line Arrangement; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the teeth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; each tooth Occlusal to the teeth.
  • the preset first arrangement rule is adopted to place all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information.
  • the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; the first difference is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be equal to the length of the unilateral dental arch
  • the difference between the existing lengths of the lateral dental arches; the first ratio is the ratio of the near-to-middle width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average value of the near-to-middle width ratio.
  • the preset average value of the near-distance width ratio is the average value of the near-distance width ratio of the tooth to be corrected calculated by the computer device according to the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the unilateral dental arch should have a length greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, that is, the unilateral dental arch should have a length and If the difference in the current length of the unilateral dental arch is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, determine to remove the second target tooth, and arrange the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule To obtain the target correction form.
  • the second target tooth may be a bad tooth, the finest tooth, or an artificially designated tooth, and the second target tooth may be one tooth or multiple teeth, which is not limited.
  • the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to Reducing the size of the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area, and then arranging all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, according to the first arrangement Regularly arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction shape, for example, move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance to obtain rearranged space, and then follow the midline Arrange the teeth neatly on the average arch line.
  • the first constraint condition that is, the length of the unilateral dental arch should be less than the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, then all The teeth are arranged in the oral cavity tissue distribution model to obtain the target corrected shape.
  • the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth, including virtual
  • the dental crowns are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target corrected shape.
  • the third target tooth may be a bad tooth, the thinnest tooth, or an artificially designated tooth, and the third target tooth may be one tooth or multiple teeth.
  • the SNA correction type is generally too large for SNA or too small for SNA, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and the first arrangement rule is followed Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
  • the SNA correction type is SNA a little too large or SNA a little too small, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
  • the computer device determines the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected according to the head side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and determines the SNA correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNA and the preset SNA threshold, and then according to the SNA correction type and oral cavity Tissue distribution model to determine orthodontic information. It can determine appropriate, more accurate and matching dental correction information for different types of SNA corrections, which further makes the dental correction information more accurate, and thus makes the dental correction model more accurate.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment.
  • This embodiment relates to when the correction method is the SNB correction method, the computer device uses a preset correction rule to determine the specific process of the tooth correction information according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the above S302 may specifically include:
  • S501 Determine the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected.
  • the computer device may obtain the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and determine the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected in the head-side slice by identifying the head-side slice.
  • the computer device may use an SNB identification model to identify the above-mentioned head-side slices, where the SNB identification model is a neural network model. This embodiment does not limit the manner in which the computer device determines the SNB according to the head side slice.
  • S502. Determine the SNB correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNB and the preset SNB threshold of the tooth to be corrected.
  • the computer device may compare the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected with a preset SNB threshold to determine the interval range where the initial SNB is located, and further determine the SNB correction type.
  • the specific process of this step is as follows:
  • the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB is too large, wherein, the SNB The difference is the difference between the initial SNB and the average value of the SNB.
  • the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB Generally too large.
  • the SNB correction type of the tooth is a little too large for SNB.
  • the SNB correction type of the tooth is that SNB is a little too small.
  • the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB Generally too small.
  • the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB is too small.
  • the above SNB average value may be preset, which may be calculated based on multiple oral cavity models, or may be obtained based on industry experience, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the preset SNB threshold may include: a first SNB threshold, a second SNB threshold, a third SNB threshold, and a fourth SNB threshold, where the first SNB threshold is greater than the second SNB threshold, and the third SNB threshold is less than the fourth SNB Threshold.
  • the types of SNB corrections can be obtained: SNB is too large, SNB is generally too large, SNB is too large, SNB is too small, SNB is generally too small, and SNB is too small.
  • the first SNB threshold may be 8 degrees
  • the second SNB threshold may be 2 degrees
  • the third SNB threshold may be 2 degrees
  • the fourth SNB threshold may be 8 degrees
  • the average SNB average may be 80 degree.
  • S503 Determine the dental correction information according to the SNB correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the computer device can determine the tooth correction information according to the determined SNB correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the above-mentioned dental correction information may include a target correction form, and the target correction form is a form of an orthosis model that can satisfy the correction target.
  • the specific process regarding this step may include:
  • the length of the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch in the oral tissue distribution model should be preset
  • the second arrangement rule is to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, wherein the second arrangement rule is used to characterize the arrangement of teeth in the oral tissue distribution model Constraint condition, the unilateral dental arch should have a total width of the teeth to be arranged on one side, and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is the actual length on the unilateral dental arch that can provide the arrangement of teeth.
  • the second arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNB value until the difference between the SNB value of the moved tooth and the average value of the SNB is less than the SNB
  • the fifth SNB threshold in the threshold moves the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-Plane
  • the vertical distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold ; Move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the direction of the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the occlusal bite.
  • the above second arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the central incisor toward the average SNB value, that is, when the SNB is greater than the average value of SNB, the central incisor is reduced toward SNB Move in the direction of SNB, when the SNB is less than the average value of SNB, move the central incisor in the direction of increasing SNB, and the difference between the two is less than the fifth SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, then the average SNB and SNB teeth are considered to be close ; Move the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour on the E-plane.
  • E-plane is the line connecting the outer edge of the nose of the face and the outer edge of the chin
  • the side of the E-plane where the face is located is determined as the first One direction
  • the other side is determined as the second direction. If the part of the lip contour is in the second direction, move the central incisor until the lip contour is all in the first direction of the E-plane, and the outer edge of the lip contour If the vertical distance from E-Plane is less than the preset first distance threshold, then the tooth is not too protruding or too concave at this time, and it can meet the requirements; according to the midline, all teeth are carried out in sequence along the average arch line Arrangement; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the teeth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; each tooth Occlusal to the teeth.
  • a preset second arrangement rule is adopted to place all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information.
  • the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; the first difference is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be equal to the length of the unilateral dental arch
  • the difference between the existing lengths of the lateral dental arches; the first ratio is the ratio of the near-to-middle width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average value of the near-to-middle width ratio.
  • the preset average value of the near-distance width ratio is the average value of the near-distance width ratio of the tooth to be corrected calculated by the computer device according to the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the first constraint is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is the unilateral There should be a difference between the length of the dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch;
  • the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule To obtain the target correction form;
  • the first ratio is a ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to a preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio;
  • the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are placed in the second arrangement rule according to the second arrangement rule. Arranged in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form.
  • the above first width threshold may be set to 4 mm
  • the first width threshold may be set to 2 mm
  • the first width ratio threshold may be set to 90 percent
  • the second width ratio threshold may be set to percent 85.
  • the SNB correction type is generally too large for SNB or generally too small for SNB, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth and the second arrangement rule Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
  • the SNB correction type is SNB a little too large or SNB a little too small, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
  • the uncorrected state of the tooth may be shown in FIG. 6a, and the target correction form determined by the tooth may be shown in FIG. 6b.
  • the computer device determines the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and determines the SNB correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNB and the preset SNB threshold, and then according to the SNB correction type and oral cavity Tissue distribution model to determine orthodontic information. It can determine appropriate, more accurate and matching dental correction information for different SNB correction types, which further makes the dental correction information more accurate, and thus makes the dental correction model more accurate.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to when the correction method is a crowding level correction method, the computer device uses a preset correction rule according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model to determine the specific process of the tooth correction information.
  • the above S302 may specifically include:
  • the computer device can calculate and compare the near-middle-distance width of the teeth and the free position of the dental arch in the oral tissue distribution model, so as to determine the type of tooth crowding correction. details as follows:
  • the crowding correction type is severe tooth crowding
  • the crowding correction is generally crowded teeth
  • the crowding correction type is a little crowded teeth
  • the crowding correction type is that the teeth are slightly separated
  • the crowding correction type is that the teeth are generally separated
  • the crowding correction type is severely separated teeth.
  • S602. Determine the tooth correction information according to the crowding level correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the computer device can determine the tooth correction information according to the determined crowding correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the above-mentioned dental correction information may include a target correction form.
  • the target correction form is a tooth form that can meet the correction target.
  • the specific process of this step is as follows:
  • the crowding correction type is generally crowded teeth
  • the first target tooth may be a bad tooth, the finest tooth, or an artificially designated tooth, and the first target tooth may be one tooth or multiple teeth, which is not limited.
  • the teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form .
  • a third target tooth is a virtual crown, and the teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the Target correction form.
  • the third target tooth may be a bad tooth, the finest tooth, or an artificially designated tooth, and the third target tooth may be one tooth or multiple teeth, which is not limited.
  • the third arrangement rule includes: moving the ectopic teeth of the lip/buccal side to the jaw side; moving the ectopic teeth of the jaw side to the lip/buccal side; according to the midline, arranging all the teeth along the average arch line ; The distance between the mesial and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone towards the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; At least one of the teeth and the counter teeth.
  • the third arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the ectopic teeth of the lip/buccal side to the jaw side; moving the ectopic teeth of the jaw side to the lip/buccal side; according to the midline, Arrange all teeth in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and middle contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth area towards the posterior tooth area Move the preset debugging distance; each of the teeth is engaged with the counter teeth.
  • the computer device determines the type of tooth crowding correction according to the oral tissue distribution model, and determines the tooth correction information according to the crowding level correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the orthodontic information determined by this method ensures that the teeth are not overcrowded or separated, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the orthodontic information.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to when the correction method is the E-plane correction method, the computer device uses a preset correction rule to determine the specific process of the tooth correction information according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the above S302 may specifically include:
  • S701 Determine the position and lip contour of the E-plane in the head-side slice according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected.
  • the computer device can obtain the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and recognize the contour of the face in the head-side slice to determine the position and lip contour of the E-plane.
  • the computer device may use a preset E-plane recognition model to recognize the head-side slice, wherein the E-plane recognition model is a neural network model. This embodiment does not limit the manner in which the computer device determines the position of the E-plane and the contour of the lips according to the head-side position film.
  • the fourth arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is located in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane
  • the vertical distance of plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second A distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
  • the fourth arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the central incisor toward the contour of the lips in the first direction of the E-plane, because the E-plane is the outer edge of the nose of the face
  • the line with the outer edge of the chin determines the side of the E-plane where the face is located as the first direction, and the other side as the second direction.
  • the part of the lip outline is in this second direction, it is moving Incisor until the lip contour is all in the first direction of the E-plane, and the vertical distance between the outer edge of the lip contour and the E-Plane is less than the preset first distance threshold, it is considered that the tooth at this time is not too prominent, It is not too concave, and can meet the requirements; according to the midline, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and middle contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold ; Move the teeth in the posterior tooth area to the direction of the posterior tooth area by the preset debugging distance; each tooth is engaged with the opposite tooth.
  • FIG. 8a is a schematic diagram of the E-plane in an embodiment.
  • the contour of the lips exceeds the E-plane. In this case, it is an abnormal situation and needs to be corrected. After the correction is completed, the requirements that need to be met can be seen in FIG. 8b.
  • the contour of the lips does not exceed the E-plane. In this case, it is normal.
  • the above-mentioned dental correction information may include a target correction form.
  • a possible implementation manner of this step is as follows:
  • the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, it is determined to remove the second target tooth, and the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule Arrange to obtain the target correction form.
  • the description of the second target tooth can also refer to the foregoing.
  • the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arranging all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, determining that all teeth are performed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule Arranged to obtain the target correction form.
  • all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the target Correct the shape.
  • the first ratio is a ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to a preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio.
  • the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are placed in the In the oral tissue distribution model, arrangement is performed to obtain the target corrected shape.
  • the description of the first target tooth, the second target tooth and the third target tooth in this embodiment can also refer to the foregoing description.
  • the computer device determines the position of the E-plane and the lip contour in the head-side slice according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and uses the preset fourth according to the lip outline and the position of the E-plane Arrangement rules, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model, and then determine the tooth correction information.
  • the above fourth arrangement rule includes moving the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour in the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and the vertical distance from the E-plane is less than the first distance threshold; According to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the angle between the central axes of two adjacent teeth is less than the preset first angle threshold, and the teeth in the posterior tooth area are moved in the direction of the posterior tooth area.
  • step S202 may include: arranging all teeth according to the preset fifth arrangement rule according to the oral tissue distribution model, and arranging the morphology of the arranged teeth As the target correction form in the tooth correction information; wherein, the fifth arrangement rule includes: moving the tooth in a direction close to a preset average value of SNA until the SNA value of the moved tooth and the SNA The difference between the averages is less than the preset fifth SNA threshold; move the tooth closer to the preset SNB average until the difference between the SNB value of the moved tooth and the SNB average The value is less than the preset fifth SNB threshold; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane Plane's vertical distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the angle between the central axes of two adjacent teeth is less than the preset
  • the computer device arranges the single teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to a preset fifth arrangement rule according to the oral tissue distribution model, and uses the shape of the arranged teeth as the target in the dental correction information Correct the shape.
  • the above fifth arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNA value, that is, when the SNA is greater than the average value of SNA, moving the central incisor in the direction of decreasing SNA , When SNA is less than the average value of SNA, move the central incisor in the direction of increasing SNA, the difference between the two is less than the fifth SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, then the SNA of the tooth is considered to be close to the average value of SNA;
  • the incisors move in a direction close to the average SNB value, that is, when the SNB is greater than the average value of SNB, the central incisor is moved in the direction of decreasing SNB.
  • the average SNB and SNB teeth are considered to be close; move the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour on the E-plane, because the E-plane is human
  • the line between the outer edge of the nose and the outer edge of the chin determines the side of the E-plane where the face is located as the first direction, and the other side as the second direction.
  • the tooth is considered It is not too prominent or too concave, and can meet the requirements; according to the midline, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line, and the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset The second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the direction of the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; each tooth is engaged with the counter teeth.
  • the specific process of “arranging all teeth according to the preset fourth arrangement rule according to the oral tissue distribution model” in this implementation manner may be as follows:
  • the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule; or, determine to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule;
  • the first ratio Is the ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average of the near-to-distance width ratio;
  • the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and the tooth is placed in all teeth according to the fifth arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the description of the first target tooth, the second target tooth and the third target tooth in this implementation manner can also refer to the foregoing description.
  • the fifth arrangement rule includes: moving the teeth in a direction close to the preset average value of SNA until the difference between the SNA value of the moved tooth and the average value of SNA is less than the preset fifth SNA threshold; move teeth closer to the preset average value of SNB until the difference between the SNB value of the moved tooth and the average value of SNB is less than the preset fifth SNB threshold; move the central incisor to the contour of the lips Move in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and the vertical distance from the E-Plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the midline, arrange all teeth in order along the average arch line ; The distance between the mesial and far contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold;; Move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; Each tooth At least one of the occlusions, so the computer equipment arranges all the teeth according to the preset fifth SNA threshold
  • the above S103 may specifically include: determining the number and each of the tooth orthodontic models according to the target correction form and the preset correction step in the tooth correction information The shape of the dental appliance model.
  • the computer device determines the target correction shape, it can determine the shape and number of the tooth orthosis models of each tooth orthosis model according to a preset correction step.
  • the above correction step may be a distance step and/or an angle step, and the distance step and the angle step may include direction information.
  • the determined orthodontic information is to adjust the anterior incisor by 1 degree in the direction of SNA reduction, and each orthodontic model can achieve an anterior incisor by 0.5 degrees in the direction of SNA reduction, then determine the first One orthodontic model will now adjust the anterior incisor by 0.5 degrees in the direction of SNA reduction, and the second orthodontic model will continue to move the anterior incisor to SNA based on the correction of the first orthodontic model
  • the direction of reduction is adjusted by 0.5 degrees to complete the adjustment of the front incisor to the direction of SNA reduction by 1 degree to achieve the purpose of orthodontics. Therefore, the determined model of orthodontic appliance is the first model of orthodontic appliance and the second A set of orthodontic models consisting of two orthodontic models.
  • the above-mentioned preset correction steps can also be adjusted.
  • the correction steps in the above example can be set to 0.25, so that the correction process is easy to accept, and thus the number of the above-mentioned orthodontic models is determined to be 4. , And in each orthodontic model, the angle between the central incisors differs by 0.25 degrees.
  • the above-mentioned correction step may be a distance step correction device, or an angle step correction device, or a combination of distance step and angle step correction device, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the computer device determines the number of dental brace models and the shape of each dental brace model according to the target correction form in the dental brace information and preset correction steps, so that during the correction process, For small corrections, reduce the number of correctors to ensure lower cost; and in the case of large corrections, install multiple correctors to achieve the purpose of gradual correction and ensure the effect of correction .
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to a specific process in which the computer device displays the correction effect. Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, as shown in FIG. 9, it includes:
  • the computer device may obtain the appearance image of the user before the tooth correction through the image acquisition device.
  • the appearance image may be a two-dimensional appearance photo of the user to be corrected, usually a front photo, a side photo and a smile of the user Photo;
  • the above appearance image may also be a three-dimensional facial image obtained by performing a face scan of the user to be corrected, and may generally include a set of images with lips closed naturally and a set of images with mouth opened.
  • the computer device determines the user's tooth change information according to the final shape of the dental appliance model and the initial shape of the user's teeth.
  • the tooth change information is estimated information, and may include tooth position change information and angle change information.
  • S803 Determine a dental correction effect diagram of the user according to the user's appearance image and the tooth change information.
  • the computer device superimposes the user's appearance image before correction based on the tooth change information to determine the amount of change in the user's corrected tooth or face information, and then generates an effect picture after the user performs correction.
  • the effect picture It can be a tooth rendering or a facial rendering.
  • the computer device obtains the user's appearance image, and determines the user's tooth change information according to the dental appliance model, so as to determine the user's tooth correction effect picture according to the user's appearance image and tooth change information, which can be more intuitive
  • the corrective effect will be displayed to determine the validity of the determined corrective model and improve the user experience.
  • the orthodontic information includes the orthodontic shape of the tooth, as shown in FIG. 10, and may specifically include:
  • each rectifier model can correct a distance of 0.5 to mm at the maximum, then the correction step can be 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, or 0.1 mm, which is not limited as long as it does not exceed 0.5
  • the correction limit of millimeters is sufficient.
  • the computer device determines multiple correction jump paths according to the preset correction step and the oral scan file.
  • the multiple correction jump paths may include at least one correction sub-path, and the correction jump paths each correspond to a target Correction form, the target correction form meets the preset correction goal.
  • a correction jump path includes three jumps in a correction step, and a target correction pattern that meets the correction goal can be obtained.
  • a possible implementation manner of this step may include: determining the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file; performing a first correction jump operation, the first correction jump operation including: The correction step and the initial shape, determining a first correction sub-path, obtaining a plurality of first correction shapes corresponding to each first correction sub-path; and determining whether each of the first correction shapes meets the Correction target; if yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form and use the first correction sub-path as the correction jump path; if not, return to perform the first correction jump operation, Until the determined correction form satisfies the correction target, and the jump path between the correction form satisfying the correction target and the initial form is taken as the correction jump path.
  • the computer device can determine the tissue distribution of the tooth according to the above oral scan file, including the initial shape of the tooth, and then perform the first correction jump operation, specifically, the computer device is based on the initial shape of the tooth according to a preset correction step , Determine the first corrective sub-path, the first corrective sub-path may be all the sub-paths that can be adjusted according to the corrective step based on the initial shape, and obtain the first corrective shape of the teeth under each first corrective sub-path , And then determine whether each first correction pattern meets the preset correction goals, where the correction goals include SNA, SNB, E-plane, crowding degree, the proximal and distal contact points of teeth and the average dental arch line The distance, teeth bite, etc. all meet the requirements.
  • the correction goals include SNA, SNB, E-plane, crowding degree, the proximal and distal contact points of teeth and the average dental arch line The distance, teeth bite, etc. all meet the requirements.
  • the first correction form When the first correction form can meet the correction target, the first correction form is determined as the target correction form, and the first correction sub-path is used as the correction jump path; when the first correction form does not meet the correction target, then Take the first corrected form as the new initial form, and return to perform the above-mentioned first corrected jump operation, and then iteratively execute until the determined corrected form meets the corrected goal, and the corrected form and The jump path between the first initial forms is used as the corrected jump path. It should be noted that there may be multiple corrected jump paths.
  • the computer device may also set a threshold for the number of iterations.
  • the computer device can determine the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file, and perform the first correction jump operation, and then determine whether each first correction shape meets the correction goal, if so, the first correction shape is determined as Target correction form, use the first correction sub-path as the correction jump path; if not, return to execute the first correction jump operation until the determined correction form meets the correction goal, and the correction form and initial form that meet the correction goal The jump path between them serves as the corrected jump path.
  • the first correction jump operation includes: determining the first correction sub-path according to the correction step and the initial shape, and obtaining a plurality of first correction shapes corresponding to each first correction sub-path.
  • a possible implementation manner of this step may include: determining the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file; performing a second correction jump operation, the second correction jump operation including: The initial shape determines a first correction direction, and a first correction sub-path is determined according to the correction step and the first correction direction, to obtain a plurality of first correction shapes corresponding to each of the first correction sub-paths, and determine Whether the first correction form satisfies the correction target; if yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form, and use the first correction sub-path as the second correction jump path; if not, then Return to perform the second correction jump operation until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and use the jump path between the correction form that meets the correction target and the initial form as the correction jump path.
  • the computer device can determine the tissue distribution of the tooth according to the above oral scan file, including the initial shape of the tooth, and then perform a second correction jump operation, specifically, the computer device is based on the initial shape of the tooth according to a preset correction step ,
  • the first correction direction may include multiple correction branch directions, for example, when the lips are misaligned, the first correction direction may include the jaw side correction branch direction, the front teeth direction correction branch direction, after Dental direction correction branch direction, etc., may also include other non-lip side correction branch directions, and then determine the first correction sub-path according to multiple correction branch directions and preset correction steps, and then obtain each first correction sub-path
  • the first correction form of the lower tooth, the first correction sub-path may include multiple sub-paths in the correction branch direction.
  • the computer device determines whether each first correction pattern meets the preset correction goals, where the correction goals include SNA, SNB, E-plane, crowding degree, proximal and distal contact points of teeth and average dental arch The distance of the line, the teeth bite, etc. all meet the requirements.
  • the first correction form When the first correction form can meet the correction target, the first correction form is determined as the target correction form, and the first correction sub-path is used as the correction jump path; when the first correction form does not meet the correction target, then Take the first corrected form as the new initial form, and return to perform the above-mentioned second corrected jump operation, and iteratively execute until the determined corrected form meets the corrected target, and the corrected form and The jump path between the first initial forms is used as the corrected jump path. It should be noted that there may be multiple corrected jump paths.
  • the computer device may also set a threshold for the number of iterations.
  • the computer device can determine the initial shape of the tooth based on the oral scan file, and perform the second correction jump operation, and then determine whether each first correction shape meets the correction goal, if so, the first correction shape is determined as Target correction form, use the first correction sub-path as the correction jump path; if not, return to perform the second correction jump operation until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and the correction form and initial form that meet the correction target The jump path between them serves as the corrected jump path.
  • the second correction jump operation includes: determining the first correction direction according to the initial shape, determining the first correction sub-path according to the correction step and the first correction direction, and obtaining multiple first corresponding sub-paths for each first correction Correct the shape.
  • the computer device can evaluate each corrective jump path according to a preset evaluation model to obtain its quantitative evaluation index, and find out that it meets the requirements according to the quantitative evaluation index, such as the lowest cost or the highest comfort level Correct the jump path as the target correction path.
  • the computer device can determine the evaluation model that meets the need by setting the weight of each index in the evaluation model, and then determine the target correction path that meets the need.
  • the shape is determined as the shape of the orthodontic model in the orthodontic model, thereby obtaining the orthodontic model.
  • the computer device determines multiple correction jump paths according to the preset correction steps and oral scan files, determines the target correction path from the multiple correction jump paths according to the preset evaluation model, and corrects the target correction according to the target
  • the orthodontic shape of each node on the path determines the orthodontic model.
  • each correction jump path corresponds to a target correction form, and the target correction form meets the preset correction target.
  • the computer device can determine the dental appliance model that can meet the correction goal by combining the correction step and the actual situation of the oral cavity reflected in the oral scan file, and, since the evaluation model is used to determine from multiple correction jump paths The optimal path that best matches the usage requirements is taken as the target correction path, and then the optimal dental appliance model is obtained according to the optimal target correction path, which further improves the accuracy of the appliance model.
  • steps in the flowcharts of FIGS. 2-10 are sequentially displayed according to the arrows, the steps are not necessarily executed in the order indicated by the arrows. Unless clearly stated in this article, the execution of these steps is not strictly limited in order, and these steps can be executed in other orders. Moreover, at least some of the steps in FIGS. 2-10 may include multiple sub-steps or multiple stages. These sub-steps or stages are not necessarily executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times. These sub-steps or stages The execution order of is not necessarily sequential, but may be executed in turn or alternately with at least a part of other steps or sub-steps or stages of other steps.
  • a device for determining a dental appliance model includes: an acquisition module 11 and a first processing module 12.
  • the obtaining module 11 is used to obtain an oral scan file of teeth to be corrected.
  • the first processing module 12 is used to determine the dental correction information according to the oral scan file, and determine the dental orthosis model based on the dental correction information, and the dental correction information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the correction goal.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine an oral tissue distribution model based on the oral scan file; and determine dental correction information based on the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to identify the oral scan file using a preset oral group identification model to obtain the oral tissue distribution model; the oral tissue identification model uses depth Learning neural network system, a model obtained by training multiple oral scan training files and models that mark the distribution of oral tissues.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to identify the oral tissue distribution model using a preset first correction model to determine the dental correction information, and the first correction model adopts depth
  • the learned neural network system is a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution models and target dentition models corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution models.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the correction method of the tooth to be corrected; the correction method includes an upper alveolar seat angle SNA correction method and a lower alveolar seat angle SNB correction method. Correction method and E-plane correction method; according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model, determine the tooth correction information.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the tooth correction information using preset correction rules according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model, and the correction rules are used to characterize Constraints required for orthodontics.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected; according to the initial SNA and the preset of the tooth to be corrected Determine the SNA correction type of the tooth; determine the tooth correction information according to the SNA correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to: if the initial SNA is greater than a preset average SNA and the SNA difference is greater than or equal to the first SNA threshold among the SNA thresholds, then the The SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely excessive, wherein the SNA difference is the difference between the initial SNA and the average SNA; if the initial SNA is greater than the average SNA, and the If the SNA difference is less than the first SNA threshold and greater than or equal to the second SNA threshold of the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is generally too large for SNA; if the initial SNA is greater than the average SNA , And the SNA difference is less than the second SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is slightly too large for SNA; if the initial SNA is less than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is less than the The third SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is a little too small for SNA; if the initial SNA is greater than
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to, if the SNA correction type is SNA severely too large or SNA severely too small, according to the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw in the oral tissue distribution model
  • the length and the existing length of the single-sided dental arch of the upper jaw adopt the preset first arrangement rule to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, wherein the first arrangement
  • the rule is used to characterize the constraint condition of teeth arrangement in the oral tissue distribution model, the unilateral dental arch should have a total width of the teeth to be arranged with a length of one side, and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is single
  • the actual length of the tooth arrangement can be provided on the dental arch on the side; if the SNA correction type is generally too large for SNA or too small for SNA, determine the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model Deglaze the adjacent surface and arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, place all teeth in the first arrangement rule according to the first
  • the first arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor closer to the average SNA value until the difference between the SNA value of the moved tooth and the average SNA value is less than The fifth SNA threshold among the SNA thresholds; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane Plane's vertical distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the midline, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line; the distance between the teeth's mesial and far contact points and the average arch line is less than the preset second A distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine that the second target tooth is removed if the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and the The first arrangement rule arranges the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form;
  • the first constraint condition is that the unilateral dental arch should have a length greater than or equal to the unilateral teeth
  • the current length of the arch is the difference between the length of the unilateral dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; if the first constraint condition is met, and the first difference
  • the value is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed, and all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the first arrangement rule Arrange in a distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; if the first constraint is satisfied Conditions, and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, then
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected; The initial SNB and the preset SNB threshold of the tooth to be corrected are used to determine the SNB correction type of the tooth; and the tooth correction information is determined according to the SNB correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to: if the initial SNB is greater than a preset average value of SNB and the SNB difference is greater than or equal to the first SNB threshold among the SNB thresholds, then the The SNB correction type of the tooth is that SNB is severely too large, wherein the SNB difference is the difference between the initial SNB and the average value of the SNB; if the initial SNB is greater than the average value of the SNB, and the The SNB difference is less than the first SNB threshold and greater than or equal to the second SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, then the SNB correction type of the tooth is generally too large for SNB; if the initial SNB is greater than the average value of the SNB , And the SNB difference is less than the second SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is a little too large for SNB; if the initial SNB is less than the average SNB, and the SNB difference is less than the The third SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to use the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw according to the oral tissue distribution model if the SNB correction type is SNB severely too large or SNB severely too small.
  • the length and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw adopt a preset second arrangement rule to arrange all teeth in the oral cavity tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, wherein the second arrangement
  • the rule is used to characterize the constraint condition of teeth arrangement in the oral tissue distribution model, the unilateral dental arch should have a total width of the teeth to be arranged with a length of one side, and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is single
  • the actual length of the tooth arrangement can be provided on the lateral dental arch; if the SNB correction type is generally too large for SNB or generally too small for SNB, determine the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model Deglaze the adjacent surface, and arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, place all the teeth in the second arrangement rule according to
  • the second arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNB value until the difference between the SNB value of the moved tooth and the average SNB value is less than The fifth SNB threshold among the SNB thresholds; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane Plane's vertical distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the midline, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line; the distance between the teeth's mesial and far contact points and the average arch line is less than the preset second A distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine that the second target tooth is removed if the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and the The second arrangement rule arranges the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form;
  • the first constraint condition is that the unilateral dental arch should have a length greater than or equal to the unilateral tooth The current length of the arch
  • the first difference is the difference between the length of the unilateral dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; if the first constraint condition is met, and the first difference
  • the value is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacently, and all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the second arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; if the first constraint is satisfied Conditions, and the first difference is less than the second width threshold
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the type of crowded correction of the teeth according to the oral tissue distribution model; based on the type of crowded correction And the oral tissue distribution model to determine the orthodontic information.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically used if the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and the tooth has labial or lateral jaw deviation Position, the type of crowding correction is severe tooth crowding;
  • the first constraint is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is The unilateral dental arch should have a difference between the length and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; if the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first A width threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic tooth, the crowding correction type is general tooth crowding; if the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is less than the second width Threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic teeth, the crowding correction type is a little crowded teeth; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal
  • the dental correction information includes a target correction form
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to remove the second target tooth if the type of crowded correction is severely crowded, and follow the preset
  • the three-arrangement rule arranges other teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; if the crowding correction type is generally crowded teeth, it is determined to adjoin the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area Deglaze the face and arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, place all teeth in the third arrangement rule according to the third arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; if the crowded correction type is a little crowded teeth, a little teeth separated, or teeth generally separated, then place the teeth in the third order according to the third arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; if the crowded correction type is severely separated teeth, determine the third target tooth as a virtual crown, and according to the third arrangement rule
  • the teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the E in the head-side slice according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected -The position of the plane and the contour of the lips; according to the position of the lips and the position of the E-plane, using a preset fourth arrangement rule, arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model and determine the teeth Correction information; wherein, the fourth arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and The vertical distance of the E-plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset The second distance threshold of; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the direction of the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each
  • the orthodontic information includes a target orthodontic form
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to: if the preset first constraint condition is met and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, then Determine to remove the second target tooth, and arrange the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth alignment rule to obtain the target correction form;
  • the first constraint condition is that the unilateral dental arch should Has a length greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, the first difference is the difference between the length of the unilateral dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch;
  • a constraint condition, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and according to the fourth Arrangement rules arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, determine that all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the Target correction form; if the first constraint condition is met and the first difference
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to arrange all teeth according to the preset fifth arrangement rule based on the oral tissue distribution model, and use the shape of the arranged teeth as the The target correction form in the tooth correction information; wherein the fifth arrangement rule includes: moving the tooth in a direction close to a preset average SNA until the SNA value of the moved tooth is equal to the average SNA The difference between is less than the preset fifth SNA threshold; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and The vertical distance of the E-Plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset The second distance threshold of; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the direction of the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth o
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine that the second target tooth is removed if the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and the The fifth arrangement rule arranges the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model;
  • the first constraint condition is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, the The first difference is the difference between the length of the unilateral dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; if the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width
  • the threshold value is less than the first width threshold value, then it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to each other, and all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule; or , Determine that all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule; if the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, then according to The fifth arrangement rule arranges all teeth in the
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the tooth correction information using a preset second correction model based on the oral scan file; the second correction model is a neural network using deep learning
  • the system is a model obtained by training multiple oral scan training files.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the tooth correction information by using a preset SNA correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model when the correction method is an SNA correction method.
  • the SNA correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, which is a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNA correction types and the target dentition models corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models.
  • the types of SNA corrections mentioned include SNA severely too large, SNA generally too large, SNA a little too large, SNA a little severe, SNA generally too small, and SNA severely too small.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the tooth correction information using the preset SNB correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model when the correction method is the SNB correction method
  • the SNB correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, which is a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNB correction types and target dentition models corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models
  • the SNB correction types include: SNB is too large, SNB is generally too large, SNB is slightly too large, SNB is slightly too severe, SNB is generally too small, and SNB is too small.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the teeth according to the oral tissue distribution model and using a preset crowding level correction model if the correction method is a crowding level correction method Correction information, the crowding level correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different crowding correction types and a target dentition model corresponding to the plurality of oral tissue distribution training models In the obtained model, the congestion correction types include severe congestion, general congestion, a little congestion, a little separation, general separation and severe separation.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the correction method using a preset E-plane correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model when the correction method is an E-plane correction method Tooth correction information
  • the E-plane correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, for multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions and target dentition corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models The model obtained by training the model.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the number of the dental braces model and each of the teeth according to the target correction form and the preset correction step in the dental correction information The shape of the appliance model.
  • the orthodontic information includes the orthodontic shape of the tooth.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine a plurality of orthodontic jump paths based on a preset orthodontic step and the oral scan file, wherein , Each of the correction jump paths corresponds to a target correction form, and the target correction form meets a preset correction target; a target correction path is determined from the plurality of correction jump paths according to a preset evaluation model; The correction form of each node on the target correction path determines the dental brace model.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file; perform a first correction jump operation, the first correction jump operation includes: The correction step and the initial form, determining a first correction sub-path, obtaining a plurality of first correction forms corresponding to each of the first correction sub-paths, and determining whether each of the first correction forms meets the Correction target; if yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form and use the first correction sub-path as the first correction jump path; if not, return to perform the first correction jump Operate until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and use the jump path between the correction form that satisfies the correction target and the initial form as the correction jump path.
  • the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file; perform a second correction jump operation, the second correction jump operation includes: The initial shape determines a first correction direction, and a first correction sub-path is determined according to the correction step and the first correction direction, to obtain a plurality of first correction shapes corresponding to each of the first correction sub-paths, and determine Whether the first correction form satisfies the correction target; if yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form, and use the first correction sub-path as the second correction jump path; if not, then Return to perform the second correction processing operation until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and use the jump path between the correction form that meets the correction target and the initial form as the second correction jump Turn the path.
  • the device may further include a second processing module, the second processing module is specifically configured to obtain a user's appearance image; determine the user's tooth change information according to the dental appliance model; according to the user's appearance The image and the tooth change information determine a dental correction effect diagram of the user.
  • the second processing module is specifically configured to obtain a user's appearance image; determine the user's tooth change information according to the dental appliance model; according to the user's appearance The image and the tooth change information determine a dental correction effect diagram of the user.
  • Each module in the device for determining an orthodontic appliance model described above may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, or a combination thereof.
  • the above modules may be embedded in the hardware or independent of the processor in the computer device, or may be stored in the memory in the computer device in the form of software, so that the processor can call and execute the operations corresponding to the above modules.
  • the dental appliance model provided by the above embodiment determines that its implementation principle and technical effect are similar to the above method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • a computer device which includes a memory and a processor.
  • a computer program is stored in the memory, and when the processor executes the computer program, the steps in the method in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented. Specifically, the processor implements the following steps when executing the above computer program:
  • the orthodontic information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the orthodontic goal
  • the orthodontic model is determined.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps in the method of any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented. Specifically, when the computer program is executed by the processor, the following steps are implemented:
  • the orthodontic information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the orthodontic goal
  • the orthodontic model is determined.
  • the computer computer storage medium provided by the above embodiments has similar implementation principles and technical effects to the above method embodiments, and will not be described here.
  • Non-volatile memory may include read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), electrically programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can include random access memory (RAM) or external cache memory.
  • RAM is available in many forms, such as static RAM (SRAM), dynamic RAM (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate SDRAM (DDRSDRAM), enhanced SDRAM (ESDRAM), synchronous chain (Synchlink) DRAM (SLDRAM), memory bus (Rambus) direct RAM (RDRAM), direct memory bus dynamic RAM (DRDRAM), and memory bus dynamic RAM (RDRAM), etc.
  • SRAM static RAM
  • DRAM dynamic RAM
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • DDRSDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM enhanced SDRAM
  • SLDRAM synchronous chain (Synchlink) DRAM
  • SLDRAM synchronous chain (Synchlink) DRAM
  • Rambus direct RAM
  • DRAM direct memory bus dynamic RAM
  • RDRAM memory bus dynamic RAM

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computing Systems (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Computer Graphics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Data Mining & Analysis (AREA)
  • Evolutionary Computation (AREA)
  • Geometry (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Artificial Intelligence (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Computational Linguistics (AREA)
  • Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
  • Dentistry (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Dental Tools And Instruments Or Auxiliary Dental Instruments (AREA)

Abstract

A dental braces model determination method and apparatus, a computer device and a storage medium. The method comprises: acquiring a mouth scanning file of teeth to be corrected (S101); according to the mouth scanning file, determining teeth correction information, the teeth correction information being used to characterize information about teeth meeting a correction target (S102); and according to the teeth correction information, determining a dental braces model (S103). By employing the present method, determination efficiency for a dental braces model may be increased, thus effectively saving working time, and increasing the accuracy of a dental braces model.

Description

牙齿矫正器模型确定方法、装置、计算机设备和存储介质Method, device, computer equipment and storage medium for determining orthodontic model 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及计算机技术领域，特别是涉及一种牙齿矫正器模型确定方法、装置、计算机设备和存储介质。The present application relates to the field of computer technology, and in particular to a method, device, computer equipment, and storage medium for determining a dental appliance model.
背景技术Background technique
随着科学技术的快速发展和人们生活水平的提高，人们对于牙齿修复的要求也越来越高。牙齿矫正器作为一种常见的牙齿矫正方式受到人们的广泛使用。With the rapid development of science and technology and the improvement of people's living standards, people's requirements for dental restoration are also increasing. Orthodontics is widely used by people as a common method of orthodontics.
通常，牙齿矫正器在制作之前，常常需要在计算机软件中先进行设计制作，之后再进行实物制作。在使用计算机软件对牙齿矫正器进行设计的过程中，牙技师往往依据自身的专业经验，通过计算机软件手动得对齿列进行排列调整，再用软件根据排列后的齿列生成相应的牙齿矫正器的模型。Normally, before making an orthodontic appliance, it is often necessary to design and make it in computer software, and then make it in kind. In the process of designing orthodontics using computer software, dental technicians often adjust the dentition manually through computer software based on their professional experience, and then use the software to generate the corresponding orthodontics according to the aligned dentition Model.
然而，传统的牙齿矫正器模型的确定方法，花费时间和精力较多，其效率低。However, the traditional method of determining the orthodontic appliance model takes much time and effort, and its efficiency is low.
发明内容Summary of the invention
基于此，有必要针对上述技术问题，提供一种能够提高确定效率的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法、装置、计算机设备和存储介质。Based on this, it is necessary to provide a method, device, computer equipment, and storage medium for determining a dental appliance model that can improve the determination efficiency in view of the above technical problems.
第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种牙齿矫正器模型确定方法，所述方法包括：In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a dental appliance model, the method includes:
获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息；根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型。Obtain the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected; determine the tooth correction information according to the oral scan file, the tooth correction information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the correction goal; and determine the tooth orthosis model according to the tooth correction information.
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种牙齿矫正器模型确定装置，所述装置包括：获取模块和第一处理模块；所述获取模块，用于获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；所述第一处理模块，用于根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，并根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device for determining a dental appliance model, the device includes: an acquisition module and a first processing module; the acquisition module is used to acquire an oral scan file of a tooth to be corrected; the first A processing module is used to determine the orthodontic information according to the oral scan file, and determine the orthodontic model based on the orthodontic information, the orthodontic information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the orthodontic goal.
第三方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机设备，包括存储器和处理器，所述存储器存储有计算机程序，所述处理器执行所述计算机程序时实现以下步骤：In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer device, including a memory and a processor, where the memory stores a computer program, and when the processor executes the computer program, the following steps are implemented:
获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息；根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型。Obtain the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected; determine the tooth correction information according to the oral scan file, and the tooth correction information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the correction goal; and determine the tooth orthosis model based on the tooth correction information.
第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现以下步骤：According to a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the following steps are implemented:
获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息；根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型。Obtain the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected; determine the tooth correction information according to the oral scan file, the tooth correction information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the correction goal; and determine the tooth orthosis model according to the tooth correction information.
上述牙齿矫正器模型确定方法、装置、计算机设备和存储介质，通过获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息；根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型，能够实现由计算机设备根据待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案，自动确定出满足矫正目标的牙齿矫正信息，并自动根据这个满足矫正目标的牙齿矫正信息生成牙齿矫正器模型，因此避免了人工手动使用计算机软件确定牙齿矫正器模型所导致的工作效率低、以及人员经验不足导致的模型准确度不高的问题，极大的提高了牙齿矫正器模型的确定效率，极其有效地节约了工作时间，且大大的提高了所确定的牙齿矫正器模型的精确度，进而增强了牙齿的矫正效果。The method, device, computer equipment and storage medium for determining the above-mentioned orthodontic model, by obtaining the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected; according to the oral scan file, determine the dental correction information, which is used to characterize that the tooth meets the correction goal According to the orthodontic information, determine the orthodontic model, which can be achieved by the computer equipment according to the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected, automatically determine the orthodontic information that meets the orthodontic goal, and automatically based on the tooth that meets the orthodontic goal The correction information generates the dental brace model, thus avoiding the problems of low work efficiency caused by manually using computer software to determine the dental brace model, and the low accuracy of the model caused by insufficient personnel experience, which greatly improves the dental brace The determination efficiency of the model is extremely effective in saving working time, and greatly improves the accuracy of the determined orthodontic model, thereby enhancing the effect of orthodontics.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION
图1为一个实施例提供的计算机设备的内部结构图；FIG. 1 is an internal structure diagram of a computer device provided by an embodiment;
图2为一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by an embodiment;
图3为另一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment;
图4为又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment;
图5为又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；5 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment;
图6为又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；6 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment;
图6a为一个实施例提供的未矫正之前的牙齿的状态示意图；FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of the state of the teeth before correction provided by an embodiment;
图6b为一个实施例提供的目标矫正形态的示意图；6b is a schematic diagram of a target correction form provided by an embodiment;
图7为又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；7 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment;
图8为又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；8 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment;
图8a为一个实施例中E-plane超标情况下的示意图；8a is a schematic diagram of an E-plane exceeding the standard in an embodiment;
图8b为一个实施例中E-plane正常情况下的示意图；FIG. 8b is a schematic diagram of an E-plane under normal conditions in an embodiment;
图9为又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment;
图10又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图；10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment;
图11为一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定装置的结构示意图。11 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a dental appliance model provided by an embodiment.
具体实施方式detailed description
为了使本申请的目的、技术方案及优点更加清楚明白，以下结合附图及实施例，对本申请进行进一步详细说明。应当理解，此处描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请，并不用于限定本申请。In order to make the purpose, technical solutions and advantages of the present application more clear, the present application will be described in further detail in conjunction with the accompanying drawings and embodiments. It should be understood that the specific embodiments described herein are only used to explain the present application, and are not used to limit the present application.
本申请提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法，可以适用于图1所示的计算机设备，该计算机设备包括通过***总线连接的处理器、存储器、网络接口、显示屏和输入装置。其中，该计算机设备的处理器用于提供计算和控制能力。该计算机设备的存储器包括非易失性存储介质、内存储器。该非易失性存储介质存储有操作***、计算机程序和数据库。该内存储器为非易失性存储介质中的操作***和计算机程序的运行提供环境。该计算机设备的数据库用于存储下述实施例中的所涉及的口腔扫描档案，可选地，还可以存储预设的组织识别模型、第一矫正模型、第二矫正模型、预设的SNA矫正模型、预设的拥挤等级矫正模型、预设的E-plane矫正模型、矫正规则、第一排序规则、第二排序规则、第三排序规则、第四排序规则和第五排序规则，有关上述各个模型和规则的描述可以参照下述方法实施例的内容。该计算机设备的网络接口可以用于与外部的其他设备通过网络连接通信。可选的，该计算机设备可以是服务器，可以是PC，可以是个人数字助理，还可以是其他的终端设备，例如PAD、手机等等，还可以是云端或者远程服务器，本申请实施例对计算机设备的具体形式并不做限定。该计算机设备的显示屏可以是液晶显示屏或者电子墨水显示屏，该计算机设备的输入装置可以是显示屏上覆盖的触摸层，也可以是计算机设备外壳上设置的按键、轨迹球或触控板，还可以是外接的键盘、触控板或鼠标等。当然，输入装置和显示屏也可以不属于计算机设备的一部分，可以是计算机设备的外接设备。The method for determining the orthodontic model provided by the present application can be applied to the computer device shown in FIG. 1, and the computer device includes a processor, a memory, a network interface, a display screen, and an input device connected through a system bus. Among them, the processor of the computer device is used to provide computing and control capabilities. The memory of the computer device includes a non-volatile storage medium and an internal memory. The non-volatile storage medium stores an operating system, a computer program, and a database. The internal memory provides an environment for the operating system and computer programs in the non-volatile storage medium. The database of the computer device is used to store the oral scan files involved in the following embodiments, and optionally, a preset tissue identification model, a first correction model, a second correction model, and a preset SNA correction Model, preset congestion level correction model, preset E-plane correction model, correction rule, first sorting rule, second sorting rule, third sorting rule, fourth sorting rule and fifth sorting rule The description of the models and rules can refer to the content of the following method embodiments. The network interface of the computer device can be used to communicate with other external devices through a network connection. Optionally, the computer device may be a server, a PC, a personal digital assistant, or other terminal devices, such as a PAD, a mobile phone, etc., or a cloud or a remote server. The specific form of the equipment is not limited. The display screen of the computer device may be a liquid crystal display screen or an electronic ink display screen, and the input device of the computer device may be a touch layer covered on the display screen, or may be a button, a trackball or a touchpad provided on the computer device housing , Can also be an external keyboard, touchpad or mouse. Of course, the input device and the display screen may not be part of the computer equipment, and may be external equipment of the computer equipment.
本领域技术人员可以理解，图1中示出的结构，仅仅是与本申请方案相关的部分结构的框图，并不构成对本申请方案所应用于其上的计算机设备的限定，具体的计算机设备可以包括比图中所示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者具有不同的部件布置。Those skilled in the art can understand that the structure shown in FIG. 1 is only a block diagram of a part of the structure related to the solution of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the computer device to which the solution of the present application is applied. The specific computer device may It includes more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components are combined, or have a different component arrangement.
随着科学技术的快速发展和人们生活水平的提高，人们对于牙齿修复的要求也越来越高。通常，牙技师使用计算机软件对牙齿矫正器进行设计的过程中，往往依据自身的专业经验，通过计算机软件手动得对齿列进行排列调整，再用软件根据排列后的齿列生成相应的牙齿矫正器的模型。然而，传统的牙齿矫正器模型的确定方法，花费时间和精力较多，其效率低。With the rapid development of science and technology and the improvement of people's living standards, people's requirements for dental restoration are also increasing. Usually, when dental technicians use computer software to design orthodontics, they often adjust the dentition manually through the computer software according to their own professional experience, and then use the software to generate the corresponding orthodontics according to the arranged dentition Model of the device. However, the traditional method of determining the orthodontic appliance model takes much time and effort, and its efficiency is low.
本申请实施例所采用的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法、装置、计算机设备和存储介质，通过计算机设备实现自动确定牙齿矫正器模型，从而提高了牙齿矫正器模型的确定效率。The method, device, computer equipment and storage medium for determining a dental appliance model used in the embodiments of the present application realize the automatic determination of a dental appliance model through a computer device, thereby improving the determination efficiency of the dental appliance model.
下面以具体的实施例对本申请的技术方案以及本申请的技术方案如何解决上述技术问题进行详细说明。下面这几个具体的实施例可以相互结合，对于相同或相似的概念或过程可能在某些实施例中不再赘述。下面将结合附图，对本申请的实施例进行描述。The following describes in detail the technical solutions of the present application and how the technical solutions of the present application solve the above technical problems with specific embodiments. The following specific embodiments may be combined with each other, and the same or similar concepts or processes may not be repeated in some embodiments. The embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings.
需要说明的是，下述方法实施例的执行主体可以是牙齿矫正器模型确定装置，该装置可以通过软件、硬件或者软硬件结合的方式实现成为上述计算机设备的部分或者全部。下述方法实施例以执行主体为计算机设备为例进行说明。It should be noted that the execution subject of the following method embodiments may be a device for determining orthodontic models, and the device may be implemented as part or all of the above-mentioned computer equipment through software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. The following method embodiments are described by taking an example where the execution subject is a computer device.
图2为一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图。本实施例涉及的是计算机设备根据待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案确定牙齿矫正器模型的具体过程。如图2所示，包括：2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by an embodiment. This embodiment relates to the specific process of the computer device determining the dental appliance model according to the oral scan file of the teeth to be corrected. As shown in Figure 2, it includes:
S101、获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案。S101. Acquire oral scan files of teeth to be corrected.
需要说明的是，上述口腔扫描档案可以为对患者口腔进行扫描获得的口腔数字影像，还可以为对患者口腔印模进行扫描获得的口腔数字影像。It should be noted that the oral scan file may be a digital image of the oral cavity obtained by scanning the oral cavity of the patient, or a digital image of the oral cavity obtained by scanning the impression of the oral cavity of the patient.
具体的，计算机设备能够获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案。可选地，计算机设备可以根据通过对待矫 正对象的口腔进行扫描，得到口腔数字影像，并对该口腔数字影像进行图像合成，生成该待矫正牙齿的口腔全景图像，然后将该口腔全景图像作为待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案。可选地，计算机设备还可以获取待矫正牙齿的口腔牙齿实体模型的影像，并将该口腔牙齿实体模型的多个影像进行图像合成，生成上述口腔牙齿实体模型的全景图像，并将该口腔牙齿实体模型的全景图像作为上述待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案。可选地，计算机设备还可以接收其他设备发送的待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案，对此本实施例并不做限定，只要是能够获取上述待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案即可。Specifically, the computer device can obtain oral scan files of the teeth to be corrected. Optionally, the computer device may scan the oral cavity of the object to be corrected to obtain a digital image of the oral cavity, and perform image synthesis on the digital image of the oral cavity to generate a panoramic image of the oral cavity of the tooth to be corrected, and then use the panoramic image of the oral cavity as a pending Oral scan files for correcting teeth. Optionally, the computer device can also obtain images of the oral tooth solid model of the tooth to be corrected, and synthesize a plurality of images of the oral tooth solid model to generate a panoramic image of the oral tooth solid model, and combine the oral teeth The panoramic image of the solid model is used as the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected. Optionally, the computer device may also receive the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected sent by other devices, which is not limited in this embodiment, as long as the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected can be obtained.
S102、根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息。S102. Determine dental correction information according to the oral scan file, and the dental correction information is used to characterize that the tooth meets the correction goal.
具体的，计算机设备可以根据上述口腔扫描档案，自动确定出牙齿矫正信息，以使得所矫正的牙齿能够满足矫正目标，即满足使用需求。其中，牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息，例如矫正状态信息和矫正方向信息。Specifically, the computer device can automatically determine the tooth correction information according to the oral scan file, so that the corrected tooth can meet the correction goal, that is, meet the use requirements. Among them, the dental correction information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the correction goal, such as the correction state information and the correction direction information.
可选地，计算机设备通过将多个口腔扫描训练档案，输入神经网络模型进行训练，得到矫正模型，并采用所训练的矫正模型，自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，计算机设备还可以根据当前口腔扫描档案中的牙齿、唇鄂等各组织分布，依据预设的规则确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，计算机设备还可以采用神经网络模型和规则相结合的方式来确定牙齿矫正信息，对此本实施例并不做限定。Optionally, the computer device inputs a plurality of oral scan training files into the neural network model for training to obtain a correction model, and uses the trained correction model to automatically determine the tooth correction information. Optionally, the computer device can also determine the tooth correction information according to the preset rules according to the distribution of the teeth, lip jaws and other tissues in the current oral scan file. Optionally, the computer device may also use a combination of neural network models and rules to determine the dental correction information, which is not limited in this embodiment.
S103、根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型。S103: Determine a dental appliance model based on the dental appliance information.
具体的，计算机设备根据所确定出来的牙齿矫正信息，进一步确定牙齿矫正器模型。其中，牙齿矫正器模型可以包括单独一个矫正器模型，也可以为多个矫正器模型组成的一套矫正器模型，该多个牙齿矫正器模型的形态可以呈现阶梯的变化，能够实现梯度的将牙齿矫正至所需要的目标状态。例如所确定出来的牙齿矫正信息为将前切牙向颚侧移动1毫米，每一个牙齿矫正器模型能够实现将前切牙向颚侧移动0.5毫米，则确定出第一个牙齿矫正器模型现将前切牙向颚侧移动0.5毫米，第二个牙齿矫正器模型在第一个牙齿矫正器模型的矫正基础上，继续将前切牙向颚侧移动0.5毫米，以完成前切牙向颚侧移动1毫米从而实现牙齿矫正的目的，因此所确定的牙齿矫正器模型为上述第一个牙齿矫正器模型和第二个矫正器模型组成的一套牙齿矫正器模型。Specifically, the computer device further determines the orthodontic model based on the determined orthodontic information. The orthodontic model can include a single orthodontic model, or a set of orthodontic models composed of multiple orthodontic models. The shape of the multiple orthodontic models can show a step change, which can achieve a gradient Orthodontics to the desired target state. For example, the determined orthodontic information is to move the anterior incisor 1 mm to the jaw side. Each orthodontic model can move the anterior incisor 0.5 mm to the jaw side. Move the anterior incisor to the jaw side by 0.5 mm. Based on the correction of the first orthodontic model, the second orthodontic model continues to move the anterior incisor to the jaw side by 0.5 mm to complete the anterior incisor to the jaw. The lateral movement is 1 mm to achieve the purpose of orthodontics. Therefore, the determined orthodontic model is a set of orthodontic models composed of the first and second orthodontic models.
本实施例中，计算机设备通过获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案，并根据口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，从而根据牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型。其中，牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息。采用该方法，能够实现由计算机设备根据待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案，自动确定出满足矫正目标的牙齿矫正信息，并自动根据这个满足矫正目标的牙齿矫正信息生成牙齿矫正器模型，因此避免了人工手动使用计算机软件确定牙齿矫正器模型所导致的工作效率低、以及人员经验不足导致的模型准确度不高的问题，其极大的提高了牙齿矫正器模型的确定效率，极其有效地节约了工作时间，且大大的提高了所确定的牙齿矫正器模型的精确度，进而增强了牙齿的矫正效果。In this embodiment, the computer device obtains the oral scan file of the tooth to be corrected, and determines the dental correction information according to the oral scan file, so as to determine the dental appliance model based on the dental correction information. Among them, the dental correction information is used to characterize the information that the teeth meet the correction goals. With this method, the computer equipment can automatically determine the orthodontic information that meets the orthodontic goal based on the oral scan file of the tooth to be orthodontic, and automatically generate the orthodontic model based on the orthodontic information that meets the orthodontic goal, thus avoiding manual Manually using computer software to determine the problems of low work efficiency caused by the model of dental braces, and the inaccuracy of the model caused by inadequate personnel experience, which greatly improves the efficiency of determining the model of dental braces and saves work extremely effectively Time, and greatly improve the accuracy of the determined dental appliance model, and thus enhance the effect of teeth correction.
可选地，在上述图2所示的实施例的基础上，上述S102的一种可能的实现方式可以包括：根据所述口腔扫描档案，采用预设的第二矫正模型，确定牙齿矫正信息；所述第二矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个口腔扫描训练档案进行训练得到的模型。Optionally, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 above, a possible implementation manner of the above S102 may include: according to the oral scan file, using a preset second correction model to determine the tooth correction information; The second correction model is a model obtained by training a plurality of oral scan training files using a deep learning neural network system.
具体的，计算机设备可以通过将多个口腔扫描训练档案，例如多个STL训练图像，输入神经网络模型进行训练，采用深度学习的算法，并得到训练之后的第二矫正模型，并将上述口腔扫描档案输入至所训练的第二矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，也可以上述口腔扫描档案输入至预先训练好的第二矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。对此本实施例不做限定。本实施例中，计算机设备能够根据口腔扫描档案，采用对多个口腔扫描训练档案进行训练得到的第二矫正模型，确定出牙齿矫正信息，从而自动确定出满足矫正目标的牙齿矫正信息，其提高了牙齿矫正器模型的确定效率，有效地节约了工作时间，并且大大的提高了牙齿矫正器模型的精确度。Specifically, the computer device can input multiple oral scan training files, such as multiple STL training images, into the neural network model for training, use deep learning algorithms, and obtain the second corrected model after training, and scan the oral cavity The file is input to the trained second correction model, so that the tooth correction information is automatically determined. Optionally, the above-mentioned oral scan file may also be input into a pre-trained second correction model, so as to automatically determine the tooth correction information. This embodiment is not limited. In this embodiment, the computer device can use the second correction model obtained by training multiple oral scan training files according to the oral scan file to determine the dental correction information, thereby automatically determining the dental correction information that meets the correction goal, which improves The determination efficiency of the dental appliance model is effectively saved, and the working time is effectively saved, and the accuracy of the dental appliance model is greatly improved.
可选地，在上述图2所示的实施例的基础上，上述S102的另一种可能的实现方式可以如图3所示，具体可以包括：Optionally, based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 above, another possible implementation manner of the above S102 may be shown in FIG. 3, and may specifically include:
S201、根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定口腔组织分布模型。S201. Determine an oral tissue distribution model according to the oral scan file.
具体的，计算机设备可以通过对上述口腔扫描档案进行识别，从而确定口腔组织分布模型，该口腔组织分布模型为采用计算机对口腔中的组织分布进行表征的虚拟模型，其能够表征口腔中的牙齿、唇、鄂、颊和牙龈等组织的分布。Specifically, the computer device can determine the oral tissue distribution model by identifying the above oral scan files. The oral tissue distribution model is a virtual model that uses a computer to characterize the tissue distribution in the oral cavity, which can characterize the teeth in the oral cavity, Distribution of tissues such as lips, jaws, cheeks and gums.
可选地，计算机设备还可以通过预先设置的识别规则，对上述口腔扫描档案进行识别，例如依据图像 中的像素点的值对图像中的组织边界进行划分，从而确定出口腔组织分布模型；可选地，计算机设备还可以接收针对上述口腔扫描档案中的组织边界的标定，从而确定出口腔组织分布模型。本实现方式中对计算机设备根据口腔扫描档案，确定口腔组织分布模型的具体方式并不做限定。Optionally, the computer device can also identify the above oral scan files through the identification rules set in advance, for example, the tissue boundary in the image is divided according to the pixel values in the image to determine the oral tissue distribution model; Optionally, the computer device can also receive the calibration of the tissue boundary in the oral scan file, so as to determine the oral tissue distribution model. In this implementation manner, the specific manner in which the computer device determines the oral tissue distribution model based on the oral scan file is not limited.
在一个实施例中，计算机设备还可以采用预设的口腔组织识别模型对上述口腔扫描档案进行识别，从而得到口腔组织分布模型。其中，该口腔组织识别模型为对采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个用于训练的口腔扫描训练档案和标注口腔组织分布的模型进行训练得到的模型。具体的，计算机设备可以通过将多个已经标注好组织分布的口腔扫描档案，例如多个STL训练图像，输入采用深度学习的神经网络模型进行训练，并得到训练之后的口腔组织识别模型，将上述口腔扫描档案输入至所训练的口腔组织识别模型，从而自动确定出口腔组织分布模型。可选地，也可以将上述口腔扫描档案输入至预先训练好的口腔组织分布模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息，对此并不限定。本实施例中采用预设的口腔组织识别模型对上述口腔扫描档案进行识别，从而得到口腔组织分布模型，其所确定的口腔组织分布模型的精确度高，且确定效率高。In one embodiment, the computer device may also use a preset oral tissue identification model to identify the above oral scan files to obtain an oral tissue distribution model. Among them, the oral tissue recognition model is a model obtained by training a neural network system using deep learning, a plurality of oral scan training files for training and a model labeling oral tissue distribution. Specifically, the computer device can input a plurality of oral scan files that have been marked with tissue distribution, such as multiple STL training images, into a deep learning neural network model for training, and obtain a trained oral tissue recognition model. The oral scan file is input to the trained oral tissue recognition model, thereby automatically determining the oral tissue distribution model. Optionally, the above-mentioned oral scan file may also be input to a pre-trained oral tissue distribution model to automatically determine dental correction information, which is not limited. In this embodiment, a preset oral tissue identification model is used to identify the above oral scan files to obtain an oral tissue distribution model, which determines the oral tissue distribution model with high accuracy and high determination efficiency.
S202、根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息。S202: Determine tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model.
具体的，计算机设备能够根据上述口腔组织分布模型，自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。Specifically, the computer device can automatically determine the tooth correction information according to the above oral tissue distribution model.
可选地，本步骤S202的一种可能的实现方式可以为：采用预设的第一矫正模型对所述口腔组织分布模型进行识别，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述第一矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个口腔组织分布训练模型进行训练得到的模型。具体可以为：计算机设备将多个口腔组织分布训练模型以及该多个口腔组织分布训练模型所对应的矫正后的目标齿列模型，输入神经网络模型进行训练，采用深度学习的算法，得到训练之后的第一矫正模型，然后将上述口腔组织分布模型输入至所训练的第一矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，也可以将上述多个口腔组织分布模型输入至预先训练好的第一矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息，对此并不限定。本方法中，通过预设的对多个口腔组织分布训练模型，以及该多个口腔组织分布训练模型所对应的矫正后的目标齿列模型进行训练所得到第一矫正模型，对口腔组织分布模型进行处理，从而自动确定牙齿矫正信息，其所确定的第一矫正模型精确度高，且确定效率高。Optionally, a possible implementation manner of this step S202 may be: using a preset first correction model to identify the oral tissue distribution model to determine the tooth correction information, and the first correction model is adopted Deep learning neural network system, a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models. Specifically, the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models and the corrected target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models into the neural network model for training, and adopts the deep learning algorithm to obtain the training And then input the above oral tissue distribution model to the trained first correction model, so as to automatically determine the tooth correction information. Optionally, the above multiple oral tissue distribution models may also be input to the pre-trained first correction model to automatically determine the tooth correction information, which is not limited. In this method, a first correction model is obtained by training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models and a corrected target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models, and the oral tissue distribution model The processing is performed to automatically determine the tooth correction information, and the determined first correction model has high accuracy and high determination efficiency.
可选地，本步骤S202的另一种可能的实现方式还可以参见下述图4所示，此处暂不赘述。Optionally, for another possible implementation manner of this step S202, reference may also be made to FIG. 4 described below, and details are not described here.
上述图3所示的实施例中，计算机设备根据口腔扫描档案，确定出口腔组织分布模型，并根据口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息，其能够使得所确定出的牙齿矫正信息与口腔扫描档案所匹配，提高了牙齿矫正信息的准确性，进而使得所确定的牙齿矫正器模型更为精确。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 above, the computer device determines the oral tissue distribution model based on the oral scan file, and determines the dental correction information based on the oral tissue distribution model, which can make the determined dental correction information and the oral scan file The matching improves the accuracy of the orthodontic information, thereby making the determined orthodontic model more accurate.
图4为又一个实施例所提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图。本实施例涉及的是计算机设备根据口腔组织分布模型确定牙齿矫正信息的具体过程。如图4所示，上述S202具体可以包括：4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to a specific process in which the computer device determines the dental correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model. As shown in FIG. 4, the above S202 may specifically include:
S301、确定所述待矫正牙齿的矫正方法；所述矫正方法包括上齿槽座角(Sella-Nasion-Apoint，简称SNA)矫正方法、下齿槽座角(Sella-Nasion-Bpoint，简称SNB)矫正方法、拥挤等级矫正方法和E-plane矫正方法。S301. Determine a correction method for the tooth to be corrected; the correction method includes an upper alveolar seat angle (Sella-Nasion-Apoint, SNA) correction method, and a lower alveolar seat angle (Sella-Nasion-Bpoint, SNB) Correction method, crowding level correction method and E-plane correction method.
需要说明的是，上述SNA为上齿槽座角，用于表征前颅底平面与鼻根点和上齿槽座点连线所形成的后下交角；上述SNB为下齿槽座角，用于表征前颅底平面与鼻根点和下齿槽座点连线所形成的后下交角；上述E-plane为人脸鼻尖的外沿与下巴外沿的连线。It should be noted that the above SNA is the upper alveolar seat angle, which is used to characterize the posterior lower intersection angle formed by the line between the anterior skull base plane and the nose root point and the upper alveolar seat point; the above SNB is the lower alveolar seat angle It is used to characterize the posterior inferior intersection angle formed by the plane of the anterior skull base and the line between the base of the nose and the base of the lower alveolar;
具体的，计算机设备可以根据接收到的用户指令，确定出带矫正牙齿的矫正方法为SNA矫正方法、SNB矫正方法、拥挤等级矫正方法还是E-plane矫正方法。可选地，计算机设备也可以通过对口腔组织分布模型进行分析，例如分析该口腔组织分模型中的SNA、SNB、拥挤程度和E-plane的位置，并与预设的标准比较，确定出所需要采用的矫正方法。对此本实施例不做限定。Specifically, according to the received user instruction, the computer device may determine whether the correction method with the corrected teeth is the SNA correction method, the SNB correction method, the crowding level correction method, or the E-plane correction method. Optionally, the computer device can also analyze the oral tissue distribution model, for example, analyze the SNA, SNB, crowding degree and E-plane position in the oral tissue sub-model, and compare with preset standards to determine the required The corrective method used. This embodiment is not limited.
S302、根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。S302: Determine the tooth correction information according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model.
具体的，计算机设备可以根据上述矫正方法，结合上述口腔组织分布模型，确定出牙齿矫正信息。Specifically, the computer device may determine the tooth correction information according to the above correction method and the above oral tissue distribution model.
可选地，若所述矫正方法为SNA矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的SNA矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述SNA矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同SNA矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型。SNA矫正类型包括，SNA严重过大、SNA一般过大、SNA少许过大、SNA严重少许、SNA一般过小、SNA严重过小。具体可以为，计算机设备将多个具有不同SNA矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型，输入神经网络模型进行训练，采用深度学习的算法，将多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型作为神经网络模型的理想输出，进行训练得到训练之后的SNA矫正模型，再将上述口腔组织分布模型输入至所训练的SNA矫 正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，也可以是将上述多个口腔组织分布模型输入至预先训练好的SNA矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息，对此并不限定。本方法中，计算机设备采用对多个具有不同SNA矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型进行训练，得到SNA矫正模型，进而确定牙齿矫正信息，由于SNA矫正模型的精确度高，因此所确定的牙齿矫正信息更为准确，且确定效率高。Optionally, if the correction method is an SNA correction method, a predetermined SNA correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the SNA correction model is a neural network system using deep learning , A model obtained by training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different SNA correction types and a target dentition model corresponding to the plurality of oral tissue distribution training models. SNA correction types include SNA severely too large, SNA generally too large, SNA a little too large, SNA a little severe, SNA generally too small, and SNA severely too small. Specifically, the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different SNA correction types into the neural network model for training, and uses a deep learning algorithm to use the target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models as nerves. The ideal output of the network model is trained to obtain the SNA correction model after training, and then the above oral tissue distribution model is input to the trained SNA correction model, thereby automatically determining the tooth correction information. Alternatively, the multiple oral tissue distribution models may be input to a pre-trained SNA correction model to automatically determine the tooth correction information, which is not limited. In this method, the computer device uses multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNA correction types to train to obtain the SNA correction model, and then determines the tooth correction information. Because the accuracy of the SNA correction model is high, the determined tooth correction The information is more accurate and the determination efficiency is high.
可选地，若所述矫正方法为SNB矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的SNB矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述SNB矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同SNB矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型进行训练得到的模型。SNB矫正类型包括，SNB严重过大、SNB一般过大、SNB少许过大、SNB严重少许、SNB一般过小和SNB严重过小。具体可以为，计算机设备将多个具有不同SNB矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型，输入神经网络模型进行训练，采用深度学习的算法，将多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型作为神经网络模型的理想输出，进行训练得到训练之后的SNB矫正模型，再将上述口腔组织分布模型输入至所训练的SNB矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，该训练样本可以为带有标注的口腔组织分布模型。可选地，也可以是将上述多个口腔组织分布模型输入至预先训练好的SNB矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息，对此并不限定。本方法中，计算机设备采用对多个具有不同SNB矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型进行训练，得到SNB矫正模型，进而确定牙齿矫正信息，由于SNB矫正模型的精确度高，因此所确定的牙齿矫正信息更为准确，且确定效率高。Optionally, if the correction method is an SNB correction method, the tooth correction information is determined using a preset SNB correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the SNB correction model is a neural network system using deep learning , A model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNB correction types. SNB correction types include SNB severely too large, SNB generally too large, SNB a little too large, SNB a little severe, SNB generally too small, and SNB severely too small. Specifically, the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different SNB correction types into the neural network model for training, and uses a deep learning algorithm to use the target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models as nerves The ideal output of the network model is trained to obtain the SNB correction model after training, and then the above oral tissue distribution model is input to the trained SNB correction model, thereby automatically determining the tooth correction information. Optionally, the training sample may be a labeled oral tissue distribution model. Optionally, the above multiple oral tissue distribution models may be input to a pre-trained SNB correction model to automatically determine tooth correction information, which is not limited. In this method, the computer equipment adopts training on multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNB correction types to obtain the SNB correction model, and then determines the tooth correction information. Because the accuracy of the SNB correction model is high, the determined tooth correction The information is more accurate and the determination efficiency is high.
可选地，若所述矫正方法为拥挤等级矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的拥挤等级矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述拥挤等级矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同拥挤矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型。所述拥挤矫正类型包括，严重拥挤、一般拥挤、少许拥挤、少许分开、一般分开和严重分开。具体可以为，计算机设备将多个口腔组织分布训练模型，输入神经网络模型进行训练，采用神经网络的算法将多个具有不同拥挤矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型作为神经网络模型的理想输出进行训练，得到训练之后的拥挤等级矫正模型，再将上述口腔组织分布模型输入至所训练的拥挤等级矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，也可以上述多个口腔组织分布模型输入至预先训练好的拥挤等级矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息，对此并不限定。本方法中，采用对多个具有不同拥挤矫正类型的口腔组织分布模型进行训练，得到拥挤等级矫正模型，进而确定牙齿矫正信息，由于拥挤等级矫正模型的精确度高，因此所确定的牙齿矫正信息更为准确，且确定效率高。Optionally, if the correction method is a crowding level correction method, then a preset crowding level correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the crowding level correction model is based on deep learning The neural network system is a model obtained by training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different crowding correction types and a target dentition model corresponding to the plurality of oral tissue distribution training models. The types of congestion correction include severe congestion, general congestion, a little congestion, a little separation, general separation and severe separation. Specifically, the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models and inputs a neural network model for training, and adopts a neural network algorithm to use a target dentition model corresponding to multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different crowding correction types as a neural network The ideal output of the model is trained to obtain the crowded level correction model after training, and then the above oral tissue distribution model is input to the trained crowded level correction model, thereby automatically determining the tooth correction information. Optionally, the above multiple oral tissue distribution models may also be input to a pre-trained crowding level correction model to automatically determine tooth correction information, which is not limited. In this method, multiple oral tissue distribution models with different crowding correction types are trained to obtain a crowding level correction model, and then dental correction information is determined. Since the accuracy of the crowding level correction model is high, the determined dental correction information More accurate and high efficiency.
可选地，若所述矫正方法为E-plane矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的E-plane矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述E-plane矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同E-plane位置的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型。具体为，计算机设备将多个具有不同E-plane位置的口腔组织分布训练模型，输入神经网络模型，采用深度学习的算法进行训练，将多个具有不同E-plane位置的口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型作为神经网络模型的理想输出，进行训练得到训练之后的E-plane矫正模型，再将上述口腔组织分布模型输入至所训练的E-plane矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，也可以上述多个口腔组织分布模型输入至预先训练好的E-plane矫正模型，从而自动确定出牙齿矫正信息，对此并不限定。本方法中，采用对多个具有不同E-plane位置的口腔组织分布模型进行训练，得到E-plane矫正模型，进而确定牙齿矫正信息，由于E-plane矫正模型的精确度高，因此所确定的牙齿矫正信息更为准确，且确定效率高。Optionally, if the correction method is an E-plane correction method, a predetermined E-plane correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the E-plane correction model is adopted The deep learning neural network system is a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions and a target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models. Specifically, the computer device inputs a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions into a neural network model, and uses deep learning algorithms for training, corresponding to multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions The target dentition model is used as the ideal output of the neural network model, trained to obtain the E-plane correction model after training, and then the above oral tissue distribution model is input to the trained E-plane correction model, thereby automatically determining the tooth correction information . Optionally, the above multiple oral tissue distribution models may also be input into a pre-trained E-plane correction model to automatically determine tooth correction information, which is not limited. In this method, multiple oral tissue distribution models with different E-plane positions are trained to obtain the E-plane correction model, and then the tooth correction information is determined. Because the accuracy of the E-plane correction model is high, the determined The orthodontic information is more accurate and the determination efficiency is high.
可选地，上述步骤S302的另一种可能的实现方式包括：根据所确定的矫正方法和口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定牙齿矫正信息，其中，矫正规则用于表征牙齿矫正所需要满足的约束条件。具体的，计算机设备可以采用预设的矫正规则，在上述口腔组织分布模型中将牙齿进行排列，以使得所排列的牙齿满足矫正目标，从而确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，本实现方式的具体过程可以参见下述图5所示的实施例，此处暂不赘述。本实现方式中，由于上述矫正规则能够表征牙齿矫正所需要满足的约束条件，因此计算机设备依据上述矫正规则所确定的牙齿矫正信息能够满足使用需要的同时，进一步提高了确定效率。Optionally, another possible implementation manner of the above step S302 includes: according to the determined correction method and oral tissue distribution model, using preset correction rules to determine tooth correction information, wherein the correction rules are used to characterize tooth correction The constraints that need to be met. Specifically, the computer device may use preset correction rules to arrange the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model so that the arranged teeth meet the correction goals, thereby determining the tooth correction information. Optionally, for the specific process of this implementation manner, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 described below, and details are not described here. In this implementation manner, since the above-mentioned correction rules can represent the constraint conditions that need to be met for tooth correction, the computer equipment can determine the tooth correction information according to the above-mentioned correction rules to meet the needs of use, and further improve the determination efficiency.
本实施例中，计算机设备能够通过确定待矫正牙齿的矫正方法，并根据矫正方法和口腔组织分布模型，进一步确定牙齿矫正信息。由于上述矫正方法包括SNA矫正方法、SNB矫正方法、拥挤等级矫正方法和E-plane矫正方法，因此计算机设备能够依据不同的矫正方法确定与之匹配的牙齿矫正信息，从而使得牙齿矫正信息更为准确，进一步提高了所确定的牙齿矫正模型的准确性。In this embodiment, the computer device can further determine the tooth correction information by determining the correction method of the tooth to be corrected, and according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model. Since the above correction methods include the SNA correction method, the SNB correction method, the crowding level correction method, and the E-plane correction method, the computer device can determine the matching tooth correction information according to different correction methods, thereby making the tooth correction information more accurate , To further improve the accuracy of the determined orthodontic model.
图5为又一个实施例所提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图。本实施例涉及的是当矫正方法为SNA矫正方法时，计算机设备根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息的具体过程。可选地，如图5所示，上述S302具体可以包括：FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by yet another embodiment. This embodiment relates to when the correction method is the SNA correction method, the computer device uses a preset correction rule to determine the specific process of the tooth correction information according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 5, the above S302 may specifically include:
S401、根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNA。S401: Determine the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected.
具体的，计算机设备可以获取待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片，并通过对该头侧位片进行识别，确定出该头侧位片中待矫正牙齿的初始SNA。可选地，计算机设备可以采用SNA识别模型对上述头侧位片进行识别，其中，该SNA识别模型为神经网络模型。本实施例对计算机设备根据头侧位片确定SNA的方式不做限定。Specifically, the computer device may obtain the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and determine the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected in the head-side slice by identifying the head-side slice. Optionally, the computer device may use an SNA recognition model to identify the above-mentioned head-side slices, where the SNA recognition model is a neural network model. This embodiment does not limit the manner in which the computer device determines the SNA according to the head side slice.
S402、根据所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNA和预设的SNA阈值，确定所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型。S402. Determine the SNA correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNA and the preset SNA threshold of the tooth to be corrected.
具体的，计算机设备可以将待矫正牙齿的初始SNA与预设的SNA阈值进行对比，从而确定出上述初始SNA所在的区间范围，进一步确定出SNA矫正类型。可选地，关于本步骤的具体过程具体如下：Specifically, the computer device may compare the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected with a preset SNA threshold to determine the range of the initial SNA and further determine the SNA correction type. Optionally, the specific process of this step is as follows:
若所述初始SNA大于预设的SNA平均值，且SNA差值大于或等于所述SNA阈值中的第一SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过大，其中，所述SNA差值为所述初始SNA和所述SNA平均值之间的差值。If the initial SNA is greater than the preset average SNA and the SNA difference is greater than or equal to the first SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely excessive, wherein, the SNA The difference is the difference between the initial SNA and the average SNA.
若所述初始SNA大于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述第一SNA阈值、大于或等于所述SNA阈值中的第二SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过大。If the initial SNA is greater than the average SNA and the SNA difference is less than the first SNA threshold and greater than or equal to the second SNA threshold of the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA Generally too large.
若所述初始SNA大于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述第二SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过大。If the initial SNA is greater than the average SNA and the SNA difference is less than the second SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is a little too large for SNA.
若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述SNA阈值中的第三SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过小。If the initial SNA is less than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is less than the third SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA a little too small.
若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值大于或等于所述第三SNA阈值、小于所述SNA阈值中的第四SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过小。If the initial SNA is less than the average SNA and the SNA difference is greater than or equal to the third SNA threshold and less than the fourth SNA threshold of the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA Generally too small.
若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值大于第四SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过小。If the initial SNA is less than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is greater than the fourth SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely too small.
具体的，上述SNA平均值可以为预先设定的，其可以是根据多个口腔模型进行计算得到的，也可以是根据行业经验得到，对此本实施例不做限定。上述预设的SNA阈值可以包括：第一SNA阈值、第二SNA阈值、第三SNA阈值和第四SNA阈值，其中，第一SNA阈值大于第二SNA阈值，且第三SNA阈值小于第四SNA阈值。由此可以得到SNA矫正类型包括SNA严重过大、SNA一般过大、SNA少许过大、SNA少许过小、SNA一般过小和SNA严重过小。可选地，通常上述第一SNA阈值可以为8度，第二SNA阈值可以为2度、第三SNA阈值可以为2度，以及第四SNA阈值可以为8度，上述SNA平均值可以为82度。Specifically, the above average value of SNA may be preset, which may be calculated according to multiple oral cavity models, or may be obtained based on industry experience, which is not limited in this embodiment. The preset SNA threshold may include: a first SNA threshold, a second SNA threshold, a third SNA threshold, and a fourth SNA threshold, where the first SNA threshold is greater than the second SNA threshold, and the third SNA threshold is less than the fourth SNA Threshold. The types of SNA corrections that can be obtained from this include SNA severely too large, SNA generally too large, SNA a little too large, SNA a little too small, SNA generally too small, and SNA severely too small. Optionally, generally, the first SNA threshold may be 8 degrees, the second SNA threshold may be 2 degrees, the third SNA threshold may be 2 degrees, and the fourth SNA threshold may be 8 degrees, and the average SNA value may be 82 degree.
S403、根据所述SNA矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。S403. Determine the dental correction information according to the SNA correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
具体的，计算机设备可以根据所确定的SNA矫正类型，依据口腔组织分布模型确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，上述牙齿矫正信息可以包括目标矫正形态，该目标矫正形态为能够满足矫正目标的矫正器模型的形态。可选地，关于本步骤的具体过程可以包括：Specifically, the computer device may determine the dental correction information according to the determined SNA correction type and according to the oral tissue distribution model. Optionally, the above-mentioned dental correction information may include a target correction form, and the target correction form is a form of an orthosis model that can satisfy the correction target. Optionally, the specific process regarding this step may include:
若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过大或SNA严重过小，则根据口腔组织分布模型中的上颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和上颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第一排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到牙齿矫正信息，其中，所述第一排列规则用于表征牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列的约束条件，单侧牙弓应有长度为单侧的待排列牙齿的宽度总和，单侧牙弓现有长度为单侧的牙弓上能够提供牙齿排列的实际长度。If the SNA correction type is SNA severely too large or SNA severely too small, then according to the length of the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw in the oral tissue distribution model and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw, the preset number An arrangement rule, arranging all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain dental correction information, wherein the first arrangement rule is used to characterize the constraint conditions for teeth to be arranged in the oral tissue distribution model, single The lateral dental arch should have the total width of the teeth to be arranged on one side. The existing length of the unilateral dental arch is the actual length of the dental arrangement on the unilateral dental arch.
具体的，当SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过大或SNA严重过小时，计算机设备根据口腔组织分布模型中的上颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和上颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第一排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，确定出牙齿矫正信息。其中，上述第一排列规则能够用于表征牙齿在口腔组织分布模型中进行排列的约束条件，该约束条件可以为一个也可以为多个的组合。上述所述单侧牙弓应有长度为单侧的待排列牙齿的宽度总和，单侧牙弓现有长度为单侧的牙弓上能够提供牙齿排列的实际长度。Specifically, when the SNA correction type is SNA severely too large or SNA severely too small, the computer equipment should have a length based on the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch in the oral tissue distribution model, using a preset The first arrangement rule is to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to determine the tooth correction information. Wherein, the above first arrangement rule can be used to characterize the constraint condition of teeth arrangement in the oral tissue distribution model, and the constraint condition may be one or a combination of multiple. The unilateral dental arch mentioned above should have the total width of the teeth to be arranged on one side. The existing length of the unilateral dental arch is the actual length of the dental arrangement that can be provided on the unilateral dental arch.
可选地，上述第一排列规则包括：将中切牙向接近所述平均SNA值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNA值与所述SNA平均值之间的差值小于所述SNA阈值中的第五SNA阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每 个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。Optionally, the above first arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNA value until the difference between the SNA value of the moved tooth and the SNA average value is less than the SNA threshold Fifth SNA threshold in; move the central incisor to the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and perpendicular to the E-Plane The distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; Moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occludes.
具体的，上述第一排列规则包括如下条件中的一个或任意多个的组合：将中切牙向接***均SNA值的方向移动，即SNA大于SNA平均值时，将中切牙向SNA减小的方向移动，SNA小于SNA平均值时，将中切牙向SNA增大的方向移动，二者之间的差值小于SNA阈值中的第五SNA阈值，则认为牙齿的SNA与SNA平均值接近；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于E-plane的第一方向移动，由于E-plane为人脸鼻尖的外沿与下巴外沿的连线，将人脸所在的E-plane的一侧确定为第一方向，则另外一侧确定为第二方向，若上述嘴唇轮廓的部分处于该第二方向，则移动中切牙，直至嘴唇轮廓全部位于E-plane的第一方向，且嘴唇轮廓的外沿与E-Plane的垂直距离小于预设的第一距离阀值，则认为此时的牙齿并没有过于突出，也没有过于凹陷，能够满足要求；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个牙齿与对牙咬合。通过上述第一排列规则，能够确保牙齿既不会发生龅牙也不会出现牙齿内陷，并且使得牙齿在牙弓线上排列整齐且中线正确，不会有错位的情况，以及牙齿的唇/颊侧形成平滑的弧面，从而确保了牙齿矫正信息的准确性。Specifically, the first arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the central incisor toward the average SNA value, that is, when the SNA is greater than the average value of SNA, the central incisor is reduced toward SNA When the SNA is less than the average SNA, move the central incisor in the direction of increasing SNA. If the difference between the two is less than the fifth SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA of the tooth is considered to be close to the average SNA ; Move the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour on the E-plane. Since E-plane is the line connecting the outer edge of the nose of the face and the outer edge of the chin, the side of the E-plane where the face is located is determined as the first One direction, the other side is determined as the second direction. If the part of the lip contour is in the second direction, move the central incisor until the lip contour is all in the first direction of the E-plane, and the outer edge of the lip contour If the vertical distance from E-Plane is less than the preset first distance threshold, then the tooth is not too protruding or too concave at this time, and it can meet the requirements; according to the midline, all teeth are carried out in sequence along the average arch line Arrangement; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the teeth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; each tooth Occlusal to the teeth. Through the above first arrangement rule, it can be ensured that neither teeth nor indentations of teeth occur, and the teeth are arranged neatly and correctly on the arch line, and the center line is correct, and there is no misalignment, and the lips of the teeth/ A smooth arc is formed on the buccal side, thus ensuring the accuracy of the dental correction information.
可选地，关于上述“根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的上颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和上颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第一排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息”的具体过程可以如下所述：Optionally, regarding the above "according to the length of the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw in the oral tissue distribution model and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw, the preset first arrangement rule is adopted to place all teeth in the The specific process of arranging in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information may be as follows:
首选确定预设的第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度；第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值。其中，预设的近远中宽度比平均值为计算机设备根据口腔组织分布模型所计算出的待矫正牙齿的近远中宽度比平均值。It is preferred to determine the preset first constraint condition that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; the first difference is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be equal to the length of the unilateral dental arch The difference between the existing lengths of the lateral dental arches; the first ratio is the ratio of the near-to-middle width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average value of the near-to-middle width ratio. Wherein, the preset average value of the near-distance width ratio is the average value of the near-distance width ratio of the tooth to be corrected calculated by the computer device according to the oral tissue distribution model.
若满足所述第一约束条件，即单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于单侧牙弓现有长度，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，即单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值大于或等于上述第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第一排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。其中，第二目标牙齿可以为坏牙、也可以为最细的牙齿，还可以为人为指定的牙齿，且第二目标牙齿可以为一颗牙或者多颗牙，对此并不做限定。If the first constraint condition is met, that is, the unilateral dental arch should have a length greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, that is, the unilateral dental arch should have a length and If the difference in the current length of the unilateral dental arch is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, determine to remove the second target tooth, and arrange the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule To obtain the target correction form. The second target tooth may be a bad tooth, the finest tooth, or an artificially designated tooth, and the second target tooth may be one tooth or multiple teeth, which is not limited.
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，以减小后牙区的第一目标牙齿的尺寸，之后按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，例如将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区移动预设的调试距离，以获得重新排列的空间，再依据中线将牙齿在平均牙弓线上排列整齐。If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to Reducing the size of the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area, and then arranging all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, according to the first arrangement Regularly arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction shape, for example, move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance to obtain rearranged space, and then follow the midline Arrange the teeth neatly on the average arch line.
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target Correct the shape.
若不满足所述第一约束条件，即单侧牙弓应有长度小于单侧牙弓现有长度，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is not met, that is, the length of the unilateral dental arch should be less than the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, then all The teeth are arranged in the oral cavity tissue distribution model to obtain the target corrected shape.
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold and greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the first arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model to obtain the target correction form;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿，包括虚拟牙冠，在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。其中，第三目标牙齿可以为坏牙、也可以为最细的牙齿，还可以为人为指定的牙齿，且第三目标牙齿可以为一颗牙或者多颗牙。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth, including virtual The dental crowns are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target corrected shape. The third target tooth may be a bad tooth, the thinnest tooth, or an artificially designated tooth, and the third target tooth may be one tooth or multiple teeth.
若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过大或SNA一般过小，则确定对所述口腔组织分布模型中的后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the SNA correction type is generally too large for SNA or too small for SNA, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and the first arrangement rule is followed Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过大或SNA少许过小，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the SNA correction type is SNA a little too large or SNA a little too small, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
本实施例中，计算机设备根据待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定待矫正牙齿的初始SNA，并根据初始SNA 和预设的SNA阈值，确定牙齿的SNA矫正类型，进而根据SNA矫正类型和口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息。其能够针对不同的SNA矫正类型采用相应的方法确定出适合的、更为准确和匹配的牙齿矫正信息，进一步使得牙齿矫正信息更为准确，进而使得牙齿矫正模型更加精确。In this embodiment, the computer device determines the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected according to the head side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and determines the SNA correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNA and the preset SNA threshold, and then according to the SNA correction type and oral cavity Tissue distribution model to determine orthodontic information. It can determine appropriate, more accurate and matching dental correction information for different types of SNA corrections, which further makes the dental correction information more accurate, and thus makes the dental correction model more accurate.
图6为又一个实施例所提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图。本实施例涉及的是当矫正方法为SNB矫正方法时，计算机设备根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息的具体过程。可选地，如图6所示，上述S302具体可以包括：6 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to when the correction method is the SNB correction method, the computer device uses a preset correction rule to determine the specific process of the tooth correction information according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 6, the above S302 may specifically include:
S501、根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNB。S501: Determine the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected.
具体的，计算机设备可以获取待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片，并通过对该头侧位片进行识别，确定出该头侧位片中待矫正牙齿的初始SNB。可选地，计算机设备可以采用SNB识别模型对上述头侧位片进行识别，其中，该SNB识别模型为神经网络模型。本实施例对计算机设备根据头侧位片确定SNB的方式不做限定。Specifically, the computer device may obtain the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and determine the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected in the head-side slice by identifying the head-side slice. Optionally, the computer device may use an SNB identification model to identify the above-mentioned head-side slices, where the SNB identification model is a neural network model. This embodiment does not limit the manner in which the computer device determines the SNB according to the head side slice.
S502、根据所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNB和预设的SNB阈值，确定所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型。S502. Determine the SNB correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNB and the preset SNB threshold of the tooth to be corrected.
具体的，计算机设备可以将待矫正牙齿的初始SNB与预设的SNB阈值进行对比，从而确定出上述初始SNB所在的区间范围，进一步确定出SNB矫正类型。可选地，关于本步骤的具体过程具体如下：Specifically, the computer device may compare the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected with a preset SNB threshold to determine the interval range where the initial SNB is located, and further determine the SNB correction type. Optionally, the specific process of this step is as follows:
若所述初始SNB大于预设的SNB平均值，且SNB差值大于或等于所述SNB阈值中的第一SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过大，其中，所述SNB差值为所述初始SNB和所述SNB平均值之间的差值。If the initial SNB is greater than the preset average value of SNB, and the SNB difference is greater than or equal to the first SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB is too large, wherein, the SNB The difference is the difference between the initial SNB and the average value of the SNB.
若所述初始SNB大于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述第一SNB阈值、大于或等于所述SNB阈值中的第二SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过大。If the initial SNB is greater than the average value of the SNB, and the SNB difference is less than the first SNB threshold, greater than or equal to the second SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB Generally too large.
若所述初始SNB大于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述第二SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过大。If the initial SNB is greater than the SNB average value, and the SNB difference is less than the second SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is a little too large for SNB.
若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述SNB阈值中的第三SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过小。If the initial SNB is less than the SNB average value, and the SNB difference value is less than the third SNB threshold value in the SNB threshold value, the SNB correction type of the tooth is that SNB is a little too small.
若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值大于或等于所述第三SNB阈值、小于所述SNB阈值中的第四SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过小。If the initial SNB is less than the SNB average value, and the SNB difference is greater than or equal to the third SNB threshold value and less than the fourth SNB threshold value of the SNB threshold value, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB Generally too small.
若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值大于第四SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过小。If the initial SNB is less than the average value of the SNB, and the SNB difference is greater than the fourth SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB is too small.
具体的，上述SNB平均值可以为预先设定的，其可以是根据多个口腔模型进行计算得到的，也可以是根据行业经验得到，对此本实施例不做限定。上述预设的SNB阈值可以包括：第一SNB阈值、第二SNB阈值、第三SNB阈值和第四SNB阈值，其中，第一SNB阈值大于第二SNB阈值，且第三SNB阈值小于第四SNB阈值。由此可以得到SNB矫正类型包括SNB严重过大、SNB一般过大、SNB少许过大、SNB少许过小、SNB一般过小和SNB严重过小。可选地，通常上述第一SNB阈值可以为8度，第二SNB阈值可以为2度、第三SNB阈值可以为2度，以及第四SNB阈值可以为8度，上述SNB平均值可以为80度。Specifically, the above SNB average value may be preset, which may be calculated based on multiple oral cavity models, or may be obtained based on industry experience, which is not limited in this embodiment. The preset SNB threshold may include: a first SNB threshold, a second SNB threshold, a third SNB threshold, and a fourth SNB threshold, where the first SNB threshold is greater than the second SNB threshold, and the third SNB threshold is less than the fourth SNB Threshold. From this, the types of SNB corrections can be obtained: SNB is too large, SNB is generally too large, SNB is too large, SNB is too small, SNB is generally too small, and SNB is too small. Optionally, generally, the first SNB threshold may be 8 degrees, the second SNB threshold may be 2 degrees, the third SNB threshold may be 2 degrees, and the fourth SNB threshold may be 8 degrees, and the average SNB average may be 80 degree.
S503、根据所述SNB矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。S503: Determine the dental correction information according to the SNB correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
具体的，计算机设备可以根据所确定的SNB矫正类型，依据口腔组织分布模型确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，上述牙齿矫正信息可以包括目标矫正形态，该目标矫正形态为能够满足矫正目标的矫正器模型的形态。可选地，关于本步骤的具体过程可以包括：Specifically, the computer device can determine the tooth correction information according to the determined SNB correction type and the oral tissue distribution model. Optionally, the above-mentioned dental correction information may include a target correction form, and the target correction form is a form of an orthosis model that can satisfy the correction target. Optionally, the specific process regarding this step may include:
若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过大或SNB严重过小，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的下颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和下颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第二排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息，其中，所述第二排列规则用于表征牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列的约束条件，所述单侧牙弓应有长度为单侧的待排列牙齿的宽度总和，所述单侧牙弓现有长度为单侧的牙弓上能够提供牙齿排列的实际长度。If the SNB correction type is SNB severely too large or SNB severely too small, the length of the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch in the oral tissue distribution model should be preset The second arrangement rule is to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, wherein the second arrangement rule is used to characterize the arrangement of teeth in the oral tissue distribution model Constraint condition, the unilateral dental arch should have a total width of the teeth to be arranged on one side, and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is the actual length on the unilateral dental arch that can provide the arrangement of teeth.
可选地，所述第二排列规则包括：将中切牙向接近所述平均SNB值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNB值与所述SNB平均值之间的差值小于所述SNB阈值中的第五SNB阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。Optionally, the second arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNB value until the difference between the SNB value of the moved tooth and the average value of the SNB is less than the SNB The fifth SNB threshold in the threshold; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-Plane The vertical distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold ; Move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the direction of the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the occlusal bite.
具体的，上述第二排列规则包括如下条件中的一个或任意多个的组合：将中切牙向接***均SNB值的方向移动，即SNB大于SNB平均值时，将中切牙向SNB减小的方向移动，SNB小于SNB平均值时，将中切牙向SNB增大的方向移动，二者之间的差值小于SNB阈值中的第五SNB阈值，则认为牙齿的SNB与SNB平均值接近；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于E-plane的第一方向移动，由于E-plane为人脸鼻尖的外沿与下巴外沿的连线，将人脸所在的E-plane的一侧确定为第一方向，则另外一侧确定为第二方向，若上述嘴唇轮廓的部分处于该第二方向，则移动中切牙，直至嘴唇轮廓全部位于E-plane的第一方向，且嘴唇轮廓的外沿与E-Plane的垂直距离小于预设的第一距离阀值，则认为此时的牙齿并没有过于突出，也没有过于凹陷，能够满足要求；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个牙齿与对牙咬合。通过上述第一排列规则，能够确保牙齿既不会发生龅牙也不会出现牙齿内陷，并且使得牙齿在牙弓线上排列整齐且中线正确，不会有错位的情况，以及牙齿的唇/颊侧形成平滑的弧面，从而确保了牙齿矫正信息的准确性。Specifically, the above second arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the central incisor toward the average SNB value, that is, when the SNB is greater than the average value of SNB, the central incisor is reduced toward SNB Move in the direction of SNB, when the SNB is less than the average value of SNB, move the central incisor in the direction of increasing SNB, and the difference between the two is less than the fifth SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, then the average SNB and SNB teeth are considered to be close ; Move the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour on the E-plane. Since E-plane is the line connecting the outer edge of the nose of the face and the outer edge of the chin, the side of the E-plane where the face is located is determined as the first One direction, the other side is determined as the second direction. If the part of the lip contour is in the second direction, move the central incisor until the lip contour is all in the first direction of the E-plane, and the outer edge of the lip contour If the vertical distance from E-Plane is less than the preset first distance threshold, then the tooth is not too protruding or too concave at this time, and it can meet the requirements; according to the midline, all teeth are carried out in sequence along the average arch line Arrangement; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the teeth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; each tooth Occlusal to the teeth. Through the above first arrangement rule, it can be ensured that neither teeth nor indentations of teeth occur, and the teeth are arranged neatly and correctly on the arch line, and the center line is correct, and there is no misalignment, and the lips of the teeth/ A smooth arc is formed on the buccal side, thus ensuring the accuracy of the dental correction information.
可选地，关于上述“根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的下颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和下颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第二排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息”的具体过程可以如下所述：Optionally, regarding the above "according to the length of the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw in the oral tissue distribution model and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw, a preset second arrangement rule is adopted to place all teeth in the The specific process of arranging in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information may be as follows:
首选确定预设的第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度；第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值。其中，预设的近远中宽度比平均值为计算机设备根据口腔组织分布模型所计算出的待矫正牙齿的近远中宽度比平均值。It is preferred to determine the preset first constraint condition that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; the first difference is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be equal to the length of the unilateral dental arch The difference between the existing lengths of the lateral dental arches; the first ratio is the ratio of the near-to-middle width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average value of the near-to-middle width ratio. Wherein, the preset average value of the near-distance width ratio is the average value of the near-distance width ratio of the tooth to be corrected calculated by the computer device according to the oral tissue distribution model.
若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第二排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中，进行排列得到所述目标矫正形态；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, it is determined to remove the second target tooth, and the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule , Arrange to obtain the target correction form; the first constraint is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is the unilateral There should be a difference between the length of the dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch;
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule To obtain the target correction form;
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target Correct form
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction In the configuration, the first ratio is a ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to a preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold, greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the second arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model to obtain the target correction form;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are placed in the second arrangement rule according to the second arrangement rule. Arranged in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form.
可选地，通常上述第一宽度阈值可以设置为4毫米，第一宽度阈值可以设置为2毫米，第一宽度比阈值可以设置为百分之90，第二宽度比阈值可以设置为百分之85。Optionally, generally, the above first width threshold may be set to 4 mm, the first width threshold may be set to 2 mm, the first width ratio threshold may be set to 90 percent, and the second width ratio threshold may be set to percent 85.
若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过大或SNB一般过小，则确定对所述口腔组织分布模型中的后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the SNB correction type is generally too large for SNB or generally too small for SNB, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth and the second arrangement rule Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过大或SNB少许过小，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the SNB correction type is SNB a little too large or SNB a little too small, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
在一个实施例中，牙齿的未矫正的状态可以参见图6a所示，其所确定的其目标矫正形态可以参见图6b所示。In one embodiment, the uncorrected state of the tooth may be shown in FIG. 6a, and the target correction form determined by the tooth may be shown in FIG. 6b.
本实施例中，计算机设备根据待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定待矫正牙齿的初始SNB，并根据初始SNB和预设的SNB阈值，确定牙齿的SNB矫正类型，进而根据SNB矫正类型和口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息。其能够针对不同的SNB矫正类型采用相应的方法确定出适合的、更为准确和匹配的牙齿矫正信息，进一步使得牙齿矫正信息更为准确，进而使得牙齿矫正模型更加精确。In this embodiment, the computer device determines the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and determines the SNB correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNB and the preset SNB threshold, and then according to the SNB correction type and oral cavity Tissue distribution model to determine orthodontic information. It can determine appropriate, more accurate and matching dental correction information for different SNB correction types, which further makes the dental correction information more accurate, and thus makes the dental correction model more accurate.
图7为又一个实施例所提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图。本实施例涉及的是当矫正方法为拥挤等级矫正方法时，计算机设备根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息的具体过程。可选地，如图7所示，上述S302具体可以包括：7 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to when the correction method is a crowding level correction method, the computer device uses a preset correction rule according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model to determine the specific process of the tooth correction information. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 7, the above S302 may specifically include:
S601、根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿的拥挤矫正类型。S601. Determine the crowding correction type of the tooth according to the oral tissue distribution model.
具体的，计算机设备可以将口腔组织分布模型中的牙齿的近远中宽度和牙弓的空闲位置进行计算和对比，从而确定出牙齿的拥挤矫正类型。具体如下：Specifically, the computer device can calculate and compare the near-middle-distance width of the teeth and the free position of the dental arch in the oral tissue distribution model, so as to determine the type of tooth crowding correction. details as follows:
需要说明的是，本实施例中关于第一约束条件、第一差值、第一比值、第一宽度阈值、第二宽度阈值、第一宽度比阈值和第二宽度比阈值的定义方式可以参见前文所述，此处不再赘述。It should be noted that, in this embodiment, regarding the definition methods of the first constraint condition, the first difference value, the first ratio, the first width threshold, the second width threshold, the first width ratio threshold and the second width ratio threshold, please refer to As mentioned above, it will not be repeated here.
若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重拥挤；If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic teeth, the crowding correction type is severe tooth crowding;
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般拥挤；If the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic tooth, the crowding correction The type is generally crowded teeth;
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许拥挤；If the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic teeth, the crowding correction type is a little crowded teeth;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许分开；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, the crowding correction type is that the teeth are slightly separated;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般分开；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold, greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, the crowding correction type is that the teeth are generally separated;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于第二宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重分开。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, the crowding correction type is severely separated teeth.
S602、根据所述拥挤等级矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。S602. Determine the tooth correction information according to the crowding level correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
具体的，计算机设备可以根据所确定的拥挤矫正类型，依据口腔组织分布模型确定出牙齿矫正信息。可选地，上述牙齿矫正信息可以包括目标矫正形态。该目标矫正形态为能够满足矫正目标的牙齿形态。可选地，关于本步骤的具体过程如下：Specifically, the computer device can determine the tooth correction information according to the determined crowding correction type and the oral tissue distribution model. Optionally, the above-mentioned dental correction information may include a target correction form. The target correction form is a tooth form that can meet the correction target. Optionally, the specific process of this step is as follows:
若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重拥挤，则去除第二目标牙齿，并按照预设的第三排列规则将其它牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。其中，有关第二目标牙齿的确定可以参见前文的描述。If the type of crowded correction is severely crowded teeth, remove the second target tooth, and arrange other teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the preset third alignment rule to obtain the target correction form. For the determination of the second target tooth, please refer to the previous description.
若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般拥挤，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第三排列规则将所有牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第三排列规则将所有牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。其中，第一目标牙齿可以为坏牙、也可以为最细的牙齿，还可以为人为指定的牙齿，且第一目标牙齿可以为一颗牙或者多颗牙，对此并不做限定。If the crowding correction type is generally crowded teeth, it is determined that the first target teeth in the posterior tooth area are deglazed adjacent to each other, and all teeth are performed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule Arrange to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form. The first target tooth may be a bad tooth, the finest tooth, or an artificially designated tooth, and the first target tooth may be one tooth or multiple teeth, which is not limited.
若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许拥挤、牙齿少许分开或牙齿一般分开，则按照所述第三排列规则将所述牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the type of crowded correction is a little crowded teeth, a little separated teeth, or generally separated teeth, the teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form .
若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重分开，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第三排列规则将所述牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。其中，第三目标牙齿可以为坏牙、也可以为最细的牙齿，还可以为人为指定的牙齿，且第三目标牙齿可以为一颗牙或者多颗牙，对此并不做限定。If the type of crowding correction is severely separated teeth, it is determined that a third target tooth is a virtual crown, and the teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the Target correction form. The third target tooth may be a bad tooth, the finest tooth, or an artificially designated tooth, and the third target tooth may be one tooth or multiple teeth, which is not limited.
其中，所述第三排列规则包括：将唇/颊侧异位牙齿向颚侧移动；将颚侧异位牙齿向唇/颊侧移动；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。Among them, the third arrangement rule includes: moving the ectopic teeth of the lip/buccal side to the jaw side; moving the ectopic teeth of the jaw side to the lip/buccal side; according to the midline, arranging all the teeth along the average arch line ; The distance between the mesial and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone towards the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; At least one of the teeth and the counter teeth.
具体的，上述第三排列规则包括如下条件中的一个或任意多个的组合：将唇/颊侧异位牙齿向颚侧移动；将颚侧异位牙齿向唇/颊侧移动；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合。通过上述第三排列规则，能够确保牙齿不会在唇/颊侧和颚侧出现错位，并且使得牙齿在牙弓线上排列整齐且中线正确，以及牙齿的唇/颊侧形成平滑的弧面，从而确保了牙齿矫正信息的准确性。Specifically, the third arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the ectopic teeth of the lip/buccal side to the jaw side; moving the ectopic teeth of the jaw side to the lip/buccal side; according to the midline, Arrange all teeth in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and middle contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth area towards the posterior tooth area Move the preset debugging distance; each of the teeth is engaged with the counter teeth. Through the above third arrangement rule, it can be ensured that the teeth are not misaligned on the lips/buccal and jaw sides, and the teeth are arranged neatly and correctly on the arch line, and the lips/buccal sides of the teeth form a smooth arc surface. This ensures the accuracy of the orthodontic information.
本实施例中，计算机设备根据口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿的拥挤矫正类型，并根据拥挤等级矫正类型和口腔组织分布模型确定牙齿矫正信息。采用该方法确定的牙齿矫正信息确保牙齿的不会过于拥挤也不会过于分开，从而确保了牙齿矫正信息的准确性。In this embodiment, the computer device determines the type of tooth crowding correction according to the oral tissue distribution model, and determines the tooth correction information according to the crowding level correction type and the oral tissue distribution model. The orthodontic information determined by this method ensures that the teeth are not overcrowded or separated, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the orthodontic information.
图8为又一个实施例所提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图。本实施例涉及的是当矫正方法为E-plane矫正方法时，计算机设备根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息的具体过程。可选地，如图8所示，上述S302具体可以包括：8 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to when the correction method is the E-plane correction method, the computer device uses a preset correction rule to determine the specific process of the tooth correction information according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 8, the above S302 may specifically include:
S701、根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述头侧位片中的E-plane的位置和嘴唇轮廓。S701: Determine the position and lip contour of the E-plane in the head-side slice according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected.
具体的，计算机设备可以获取待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片，并通过对该头侧位片中的人脸轮廓进行识别，从而确定出E-plane的位置和嘴唇轮廓。可选地，计算机设备可以采用预设的E-plane识别模型对上述头侧位片进行识别，其中，该E-plane识别模型为神经网络模型。本实施例对计算机设备根据头侧位片确定E-plane的位置和嘴唇轮廓的方式不做限定。Specifically, the computer device can obtain the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and recognize the contour of the face in the head-side slice to determine the position and lip contour of the E-plane. Optionally, the computer device may use a preset E-plane recognition model to recognize the head-side slice, wherein the E-plane recognition model is a neural network model. This embodiment does not limit the manner in which the computer device determines the position of the E-plane and the contour of the lips according to the head-side position film.
S702、根据所述嘴唇轮廓与所述E-plane的位置，采用预设的第四排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，并确定所述牙齿矫正信息。S702. According to the contour of the lips and the position of the E-plane, adopt a preset fourth arrangement rule, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model, and determine the tooth correction information.
其中，所述第四排列规则包括：将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。Wherein, the fourth arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is located in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane The vertical distance of plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second A distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
具体的，上述第四排列规则包括如下条件中的一个或任意多个的组合：将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，由于E-plane为人脸鼻尖的外沿与下巴外沿的连线，将人脸所在的E-plane的一侧确定为第一方向，则另外一侧确定为第二方向，若上述嘴唇轮廓的部分处于该第二方向，则移动中切牙，直至嘴唇轮廓全部位于E-plane的第一方向，且嘴唇轮廓的外沿与E-Plane的垂直距离小于预设的第一距离阀值，则认为此时的牙齿并没有过于突出，也没有过于凹陷，能够满足要求；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个牙齿与对牙咬合。通过上述第四排列规则，能够确保E-plane满足要求，不会发生龅牙也不会出现牙齿内陷，并且使得牙齿在牙弓线上排列整齐且中线正确，不会有错位的情况，以及牙齿的唇/颊侧形成平滑的弧面，从而确保了牙齿矫正信息的准确性。Specifically, the fourth arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the central incisor toward the contour of the lips in the first direction of the E-plane, because the E-plane is the outer edge of the nose of the face The line with the outer edge of the chin determines the side of the E-plane where the face is located as the first direction, and the other side as the second direction. If the part of the lip outline is in this second direction, it is moving Incisor until the lip contour is all in the first direction of the E-plane, and the vertical distance between the outer edge of the lip contour and the E-Plane is less than the preset first distance threshold, it is considered that the tooth at this time is not too prominent, It is not too concave, and can meet the requirements; according to the midline, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and middle contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold ; Move the teeth in the posterior tooth area to the direction of the posterior tooth area by the preset debugging distance; each tooth is engaged with the opposite tooth. Through the above-mentioned fourth arrangement rule, it can be ensured that the E-plane meets the requirements, and there will be no buckling or tooth indentation, and the teeth will be aligned neatly and correctly on the arch line, and there will be no misalignment, and The lip/buccal side of the tooth forms a smooth arc to ensure the accuracy of the dental correction information.
可选地，图8a为一个实施例中E-plane的示意图，图8a中，嘴唇轮廓超过E-plane，该情况下，为异常情况，需要进行较正。在完成矫正之后，需要满足的要求可以参见图8b所示，图8b中，嘴唇轮廓并没有超过E-plane，该情况下，为正常情况。Optionally, FIG. 8a is a schematic diagram of the E-plane in an embodiment. In FIG. 8a, the contour of the lips exceeds the E-plane. In this case, it is an abnormal situation and needs to be corrected. After the correction is completed, the requirements that need to be met can be seen in FIG. 8b. In FIG. 8b, the contour of the lips does not exceed the E-plane. In this case, it is normal.
可选地，上述牙齿矫正信息可以包括目标矫正形态。本步骤的一种可能的实现方式具体如下：Optionally, the above-mentioned dental correction information may include a target correction form. A possible implementation manner of this step is as follows:
需要说明的是，本实施例中关于第一约束条件、第一差值、第一比值、第一宽度阈值、第二宽度阈值、第一宽度比阈值和第二宽度比阈值的定义方式可以参见前文所述，此处不再赘述。It should be noted that, in this embodiment, regarding the definition methods of the first constraint condition, the first difference value, the first ratio, the first width threshold, the second width threshold, the first width ratio threshold and the second width ratio threshold, please refer to As mentioned above, it will not be repeated here.
若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第四排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。关于第二目标牙齿的描述也可以参见前文所述。If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, it is determined to remove the second target tooth, and the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule Arrange to obtain the target correction form. The description of the second target tooth can also refer to the foregoing.
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，确定按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arranging all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, determining that all teeth are performed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule Arranged to obtain the target correction form.
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有 牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态.If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the target Correct the shape.
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the In the target correction form, the first ratio is a ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to a preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio.
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold, greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the fourth arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model to obtain the target correction form.
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中，进行排列得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are placed in the In the oral tissue distribution model, arrangement is performed to obtain the target corrected shape.
本实施例中关于第一目标牙齿、第二目标牙齿和第三目标牙齿的描述也可以参见前文所述。The description of the first target tooth, the second target tooth and the third target tooth in this embodiment can also refer to the foregoing description.
本实施例中，计算机设备根据待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定头侧位片中的E-plane的位置和嘴唇轮廓，并根据嘴唇轮廓与E-plane的位置，采用预设的第四排列规则，将所有牙齿在口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，进而确定牙齿矫正信息。由于上述第四排列规则包括将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于E-plane的第一方向移动，直至嘴唇轮廓位于E-plane的第一方向并且与E-plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；相邻两颗牙齿的中轴线之间的夹角小于预设的第一角度阈值，将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个，因此计算机设备采用上述第四排列规则，根据头侧位片中的E-plane的位置和嘴唇轮廓，将所有牙齿在口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，并确定牙齿矫正信息，能够使得牙齿既不会发生龅牙也不会出现牙齿内陷，并且使得牙齿在牙弓线上排列整齐且中线正确，不会有错位的情况，以及牙齿的唇/颊侧形成平滑的弧面，从而确保了牙齿矫正信息的准确性。In this embodiment, the computer device determines the position of the E-plane and the lip contour in the head-side slice according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected, and uses the preset fourth according to the lip outline and the position of the E-plane Arrangement rules, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model, and then determine the tooth correction information. Since the above fourth arrangement rule includes moving the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour in the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and the vertical distance from the E-plane is less than the first distance threshold; According to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the angle between the central axes of two adjacent teeth is less than the preset first angle threshold, and the teeth in the posterior tooth area are moved in the direction of the posterior tooth area. The set debugging distance; at least one of each tooth and the counter teeth bite, so the computer equipment adopts the fourth arrangement rule above, according to the position of the E-plane and the lip contour in the head side slice, all teeth are distributed in the oral tissue Arrange in the model, and determine the orthodontic information, so that the teeth will not have buckling or indentation, and the teeth will be aligned neatly and correctly on the arch line, and there will be no misalignment, and The lip/buccal side of the tooth forms a smooth arc to ensure the accuracy of the dental correction information.
在一个实施例中，上述步骤S202的另外一种可能的实现方式可以包括：根据所述口腔组织分布模型，按照预设的第五排列规则将所有牙齿进行排列，并将排列后的牙齿的形态作为所述牙齿矫正信息中的目标矫正形态；其中，所述第五排列规则包括：将所述牙齿向接近预设的SNA平均值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNA值与所述SNA平均值之间的差值小于预设的第五SNA阈值；将所述牙齿向接近预设的SNB平均值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNB值与所述SNB平均值之间的差值小于预设的第五SNB阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；相邻两颗牙齿的中轴线之间的夹角小于预设的第一角度阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。In an embodiment, another possible implementation manner of the above step S202 may include: arranging all teeth according to the preset fifth arrangement rule according to the oral tissue distribution model, and arranging the morphology of the arranged teeth As the target correction form in the tooth correction information; wherein, the fifth arrangement rule includes: moving the tooth in a direction close to a preset average value of SNA until the SNA value of the moved tooth and the SNA The difference between the averages is less than the preset fifth SNA threshold; move the tooth closer to the preset SNB average until the difference between the SNB value of the moved tooth and the SNB average The value is less than the preset fifth SNB threshold; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane Plane's vertical distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the angle between the central axes of two adjacent teeth is less than the preset first angle threshold; The teeth of the dental zone move a preset debugging distance in the direction of the posterior dental zone; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occludes.
具体的，计算机设备根据口腔组织分布模型，将该口腔组织分布模型中的单颗牙齿按照预设的第五排列规则进行排列，并将排列后的牙齿的形态作为所述牙齿矫正信息中的目标矫正形态。上述第五排列规则包括如下条件中的一个或任意多个的组合：将中切牙向接***均SNA值的方向移动，即SNA大于SNA平均值时，将中切牙向SNA减小的方向移动，SNA小于SNA平均值时，将中切牙向SNA增大的方向移动，二者之间的差值小于SNA阈值中的第五SNA阈值，则认为牙齿的SNA与SNA平均值接近；将中切牙向接***均SNB值的方向移动，即SNB大于SNB平均值时，将中切牙向SNB减小的方向移动，SNB小于SNB平均值时，将中切牙向SNB增大的方向移动，二者之间的差值小于SNB阈值中的第五SNB阈值，则认为牙齿的SNB与SNB平均值接近；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于E-plane的第一方向移动，由于E-plane为人脸鼻尖的外沿与下巴外沿的连线，将人脸所在的E-plane的一侧确定为第一方向，则另外一侧确定为第二方向，若上述嘴唇轮廓的部分处于该第二方向，则移动中切牙，直至嘴唇轮廓全部位于E-plane的第一方向，且嘴唇轮廓的外沿与E-Plane的垂直距离小于预设的第一距离阀值，则认为此时的牙齿并没有过于突出，也没有过于凹陷，能够满足要求；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列，牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个牙齿与对牙咬合。Specifically, the computer device arranges the single teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to a preset fifth arrangement rule according to the oral tissue distribution model, and uses the shape of the arranged teeth as the target in the dental correction information Correct the shape. The above fifth arrangement rule includes one or any combination of the following conditions: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNA value, that is, when the SNA is greater than the average value of SNA, moving the central incisor in the direction of decreasing SNA , When SNA is less than the average value of SNA, move the central incisor in the direction of increasing SNA, the difference between the two is less than the fifth SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, then the SNA of the tooth is considered to be close to the average value of SNA; The incisors move in a direction close to the average SNB value, that is, when the SNB is greater than the average value of SNB, the central incisor is moved in the direction of decreasing SNB. If the difference between the two is less than the fifth SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, the average SNB and SNB teeth are considered to be close; move the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour on the E-plane, because the E-plane is human The line between the outer edge of the nose and the outer edge of the chin determines the side of the E-plane where the face is located as the first direction, and the other side as the second direction. If the part of the lip outline is on this second Direction, move the central incisor until the lip contour is all in the first direction of the E-plane, and the vertical distance between the outer edge of the lip contour and the E-Plane is less than the preset first distance threshold, then the tooth is considered It is not too prominent or too concave, and can meet the requirements; according to the midline, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line, and the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset The second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the direction of the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; each tooth is engaged with the counter teeth.
可选地，本实现方式中的“根据所述口腔组织分布模型，按照预设的第四排列规则将所有牙齿进行排列”的具体过程可以如下所述:Optionally, the specific process of “arranging all teeth according to the preset fourth arrangement rule according to the oral tissue distribution model” in this implementation manner may be as follows:
需要说明的是，下述关于第一约束条件、第一差值、第一比值、第一宽度阈值、第二宽度阈值、第一宽度比阈值和第二宽度比阈值的定义方式可以参见前文所述，此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the following definitions of the first constraint condition, the first difference value, the first ratio, the first width threshold, the second width threshold, the first width ratio threshold and the second width ratio threshold can be referred to the foregoing It will not be repeated here.
若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第五排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, it is determined to remove the second target tooth, and the remaining teeth are placed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule Arrange
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；或者，确定按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule; or, determine to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule;
若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule, the first ratio Is the ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average of the near-to-distance width ratio;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold, greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the fifth arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model;
若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第五排列规则将所述牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and the tooth is placed in all teeth according to the fifth arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model.
本实现方式中关于第一目标牙齿、第二目标牙齿和第三目标牙齿的描述也可以参见前文所述。The description of the first target tooth, the second target tooth and the third target tooth in this implementation manner can also refer to the foregoing description.
本实现方式中，由于上述第五排列规则包括：将牙齿向接近预设的SNA平均值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNA值与SNA平均值之间的差值小于预设的第五SNA阈值；将牙齿向接近预设的SNB平均值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNB值与SNB平均值之间的差值小于预设的第五SNB阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于E-plane的第一方向移动，直至嘴唇轮廓位于E-plane的第一方向并且与E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个，因此计算机设备根据口腔组织分布模型，按照预设的第五排列规则将所有牙齿进行排列所得到的目标矫正形态能够确保牙齿既不会发生龅牙也不会出现牙齿内陷，并且使得牙齿在牙弓线上排列整齐且中线正确，不会有错位的情况，以及牙齿的唇/颊侧形成平滑的弧面，从而确保了牙齿矫正信息的准确性。In this implementation manner, since the fifth arrangement rule includes: moving the teeth in a direction close to the preset average value of SNA until the difference between the SNA value of the moved tooth and the average value of SNA is less than the preset fifth SNA threshold; move teeth closer to the preset average value of SNB until the difference between the SNB value of the moved tooth and the average value of SNB is less than the preset fifth SNB threshold; move the central incisor to the contour of the lips Move in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and the vertical distance from the E-Plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the midline, arrange all teeth in order along the average arch line ; The distance between the mesial and far contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold;; Move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; Each tooth At least one of the occlusions, so the computer equipment arranges all the teeth according to the preset fifth arrangement rule according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the target correction shape can ensure that the teeth will not occur. The teeth are indented, and the teeth are arranged neatly and correctly on the arch line, and there is no misalignment, and the lips/buccal sides of the teeth form a smooth arc surface, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the dental correction information.
在上述各个实施例的基础上，可选地，上述S103具体可以包括：根据所述牙齿矫正信息中的目标矫正形态和预设的矫正步进，确定所述牙齿矫正器模型的数量和每个所述牙齿矫正器模型的形态。Based on the above embodiments, optionally, the above S103 may specifically include: determining the number and each of the tooth orthodontic models according to the target correction form and the preset correction step in the tooth correction information The shape of the dental appliance model.
具体的，计算机设备确定了目标矫正形态之后，可以根据预设的矫正步进，确定出每一个牙齿矫正器模型的形态和牙齿矫正器模型的数量。需要说明的是，上述矫正步进可以为距离步进和/或角度步进，该距离步进和角度步进可以包含方向信息。例如，确定出来的牙齿矫正信息为将前切牙向SNA减小的方向调整1度，而每一个牙齿矫正器模型能够实现将前切牙向SNA减小的方向调整0.5度，则确定出第一个牙齿矫正器模型现将将前切牙向SNA减小的方向调整0.5度，第二个牙齿矫正器模型在第一个牙齿矫正器模型的矫正基础上，继续将将前切牙向SNA减小的方向调整0.5度，以完成将前切牙向SNA减小的方向调整1度从而实现牙齿矫正的目的，因此所确定的牙齿矫正器模型为上述第一个牙齿矫正器模型和第二个矫正器模型组成的一套牙齿矫正器模型。可选地，上述预设的矫正步进还可以进行调整，例如，可以通过将上述例子中的矫正步进设置为0.25，以使得矫正过程易于接受，从而确定出上述牙齿矫正器模型为4个，且每一个牙齿矫正器模型中，中切牙的角度之间相差0.25度。可选地，上述矫正步进可以为距离步进的矫正器，或者角度步进的矫正器，还可以为结合距离步进和角度步进的矫正器，本实施例对此不做限定。Specifically, after the computer device determines the target correction shape, it can determine the shape and number of the tooth orthosis models of each tooth orthosis model according to a preset correction step. It should be noted that the above correction step may be a distance step and/or an angle step, and the distance step and the angle step may include direction information. For example, if the determined orthodontic information is to adjust the anterior incisor by 1 degree in the direction of SNA reduction, and each orthodontic model can achieve an anterior incisor by 0.5 degrees in the direction of SNA reduction, then determine the first One orthodontic model will now adjust the anterior incisor by 0.5 degrees in the direction of SNA reduction, and the second orthodontic model will continue to move the anterior incisor to SNA based on the correction of the first orthodontic model The direction of reduction is adjusted by 0.5 degrees to complete the adjustment of the front incisor to the direction of SNA reduction by 1 degree to achieve the purpose of orthodontics. Therefore, the determined model of orthodontic appliance is the first model of orthodontic appliance and the second A set of orthodontic models consisting of two orthodontic models. Optionally, the above-mentioned preset correction steps can also be adjusted. For example, the correction steps in the above example can be set to 0.25, so that the correction process is easy to accept, and thus the number of the above-mentioned orthodontic models is determined to be 4. , And in each orthodontic model, the angle between the central incisors differs by 0.25 degrees. Optionally, the above-mentioned correction step may be a distance step correction device, or an angle step correction device, or a combination of distance step and angle step correction device, which is not limited in this embodiment.
本实施例中，计算机设备根据牙齿矫正信息中的目标矫正形态和预设的矫正步进，确定牙齿矫正器模型的数量和每个所述牙齿矫正器模型的形态，从而使得在矫正过程中，对于矫正幅度较小的情况下，减少矫正器的数量，以确保成本较低；以及在矫正幅度较大的情况下，通过设置多个矫正器，从而实现逐步矫正的目的，确保了矫正的效果。In this embodiment, the computer device determines the number of dental brace models and the shape of each dental brace model according to the target correction form in the dental brace information and preset correction steps, so that during the correction process, For small corrections, reduce the number of correctors to ensure lower cost; and in the case of large corrections, install multiple correctors to achieve the purpose of gradual correction and ensure the effect of correction .
图9为又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图。本实施例涉及的是计算机设备将矫正效果进行展示的具体过程。可选地，在上述各个实施例的基础上，如图9所示，包括：9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by another embodiment. This embodiment relates to a specific process in which the computer device displays the correction effect. Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, as shown in FIG. 9, it includes:
S801、获取用户的外观影像。S801. Obtain a user's appearance image.
具体的，计算机设备可以通过图像获取设备获取用户在牙齿校正前的外观影像，可选地，该外观影像 可以是待矫正用户的二维外观照片，通常可以是用户的正面照片、侧面照片和微笑照片；可选地，上述外观影像还可以是对待矫正用户进行脸扫所获取的三维脸部图像，通常可以包括嘴唇自然闭合的一套图像和张口的一套图像。Specifically, the computer device may obtain the appearance image of the user before the tooth correction through the image acquisition device. Optionally, the appearance image may be a two-dimensional appearance photo of the user to be corrected, usually a front photo, a side photo and a smile of the user Photo; optionally, the above appearance image may also be a three-dimensional facial image obtained by performing a face scan of the user to be corrected, and may generally include a set of images with lips closed naturally and a set of images with mouth opened.
S802、根据所述牙齿矫正器模型确定用户的牙齿变化信息。S802. Determine the user's tooth change information according to the dental appliance model.
计算机设备根据上述牙齿矫正器模型的最终形态，结合用户的牙齿初始形态，确定出用户的牙齿变化信息。该牙齿变化信息为预估的信息，可以包括牙齿的位置变化信息和角度变化信息。The computer device determines the user's tooth change information according to the final shape of the dental appliance model and the initial shape of the user's teeth. The tooth change information is estimated information, and may include tooth position change information and angle change information.
S803、根据所述用户的外观影像和所述牙齿变化信息确定所述用户的牙齿矫正效果图。S803: Determine a dental correction effect diagram of the user according to the user's appearance image and the tooth change information.
具体的，计算机设备根据上述牙齿变化信息叠加在上述用户的矫正前的外观影像上，从而确定用户矫正后的牙齿或者脸部信息的变化量，进而生成用户实施矫正之后的效果图，该效果图可以为牙齿效果图，也可以为脸部效果图。Specifically, the computer device superimposes the user's appearance image before correction based on the tooth change information to determine the amount of change in the user's corrected tooth or face information, and then generates an effect picture after the user performs correction. The effect picture It can be a tooth rendering or a facial rendering.
本实施例中，计算机设备通过获取用户的外观影像，并根据牙齿矫正器模型确定用户的牙齿变化信息，从而根据用户的外观影像和牙齿变化信息确定用户的牙齿矫正效果图，进而能够更为直观地将矫正效果进行展示，从确定使得所确定的牙齿矫正模型的有效性，且提高了用户体验。In this embodiment, the computer device obtains the user's appearance image, and determines the user's tooth change information according to the dental appliance model, so as to determine the user's tooth correction effect picture according to the user's appearance image and tooth change information, which can be more intuitive The corrective effect will be displayed to determine the validity of the determined corrective model and improve the user experience.
图10为又一个实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的流程示意图。本实施例涉及的是计算机设备根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型的具体过程。可选地，在上述各个实施例的基础上，所述牙齿矫正信息包括牙齿的矫正形态，如图10所示，具体可以包括：10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a dental appliance model provided by yet another embodiment. This embodiment relates to a specific process in which a computer device determines dental correction information based on the oral scan file, and determines a dental brace model based on the dental correction information. Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the orthodontic information includes the orthodontic shape of the tooth, as shown in FIG. 10, and may specifically include:
S901、根据预设的矫正步进和所述口腔扫描档案，确定多个矫正跳转路径，其中，每个所述矫正跳转路径对应一个目标矫正形态，所述目标矫正形态满足预设的矫正目标。S901. Determine multiple correction jump paths according to a preset correction step and the oral scan file, wherein each correction jump path corresponds to a target correction form, and the target correction form meets the preset correction aims.
需要说明的是，上述该矫正步进可以是每个矫正器模型的矫正极限值，也可以小于该矫正极限值。其可以是距离步进，也可以是角度步进。例如，每一只矫正器模型最大可以矫正0.5给毫米的距离，则该矫正步进可以是0.5毫米，也可以是0.3毫米，还可以是0.1毫米毫米，对此并不限定，只要不超过0.5毫米的矫正极限值即可。It should be noted that the above-mentioned correction step may be the correction positive limit value of each corrector model, or may be smaller than the correction positive limit value. It can be a distance step or an angle step. For example, each rectifier model can correct a distance of 0.5 to mm at the maximum, then the correction step can be 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, or 0.1 mm, which is not limited as long as it does not exceed 0.5 The correction limit of millimeters is sufficient.
具体的，计算机设备根据预设的矫正步进和口腔扫描档案，确定出多个矫正跳转路径，该多个矫正跳转路径可以包括至少一个矫正子路径，且矫正跳转路径均对应一个目标矫正形态，该目标矫正形态满足预设的矫正目标。例如，一个矫正跳转路径包括按照矫正步进跳转三次，就可以得到一个满足矫正目标的目标矫正形态。Specifically, the computer device determines multiple correction jump paths according to the preset correction step and the oral scan file. The multiple correction jump paths may include at least one correction sub-path, and the correction jump paths each correspond to a target Correction form, the target correction form meets the preset correction goal. For example, a correction jump path includes three jumps in a correction step, and a target correction pattern that meets the correction goal can be obtained.
可选地，该步骤的一种可能的实现方式可以包括：根据所述口腔扫描档案确定所述牙齿的初始形态；执行第一矫正跳转操作，所述第一矫正跳转操作包括：根据所述矫正步进和所述初始形态，确定第一矫正子路径，得到每个所述第一矫正子路经对应的多个第一矫正形态；并判断每个所述第一矫正形态是否满足所述矫正目标；若是，则将所述第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，将所述第一矫正子路径作为所述矫正跳转路径；若否，则返回执行所述第一矫正跳转操作，直至所确定的矫正形态满足所述矫正目标，并将满足所述矫正目标的矫正形态和所述初始形态之间的跳转路径作为所述矫正跳转路径。Optionally, a possible implementation manner of this step may include: determining the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file; performing a first correction jump operation, the first correction jump operation including: The correction step and the initial shape, determining a first correction sub-path, obtaining a plurality of first correction shapes corresponding to each first correction sub-path; and determining whether each of the first correction shapes meets the Correction target; if yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form and use the first correction sub-path as the correction jump path; if not, return to perform the first correction jump operation, Until the determined correction form satisfies the correction target, and the jump path between the correction form satisfying the correction target and the initial form is taken as the correction jump path.
具体的，计算机设备可以根据上述口腔扫描档案确定出牙齿的组织分布，包括牙齿的初始形态，然后执行第一矫正跳转操作，具体为，计算机设备根据预设的矫正步进基于牙齿的初始形态，确定第一矫正子路径，该第一矫正子路径可以为基于上述初始形态，能够按照矫正步进实现调整的所有子路径，并得到每个第一矫正子路径下的牙齿的第一矫正形态，然后判断每个第一矫正形态是否满足预设的矫正目标，其中，该矫正目标包括SNA、SNB、E-plane、拥挤程度、牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离、牙齿咬合等均满足要求。当上述第一矫正形态能够满足矫正目标时，则将第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，并将第一矫正子路径作为矫正跳转路径；当上述第一矫正形态不满足矫正目标时，则将第一矫正形态作为新的初始形态，并返回执行上述第一矫正跳转操作，依此迭代执行，直至所确定的矫正形态满足所述矫正目标，并将满足所述矫正目标的矫正形态和第一个初始形态之间的跳转路径作为矫正跳转路径。需要说明的是，所得到的矫正跳转路径可能为多条。可选地，计算机设备还可以设置迭代次数阈值，当上述第一矫正跳转操作的迭代次数超过该迭代次数阈值时，则确认该路径代价过大，因此放弃该条路径，即停止跳转。本实现方式，由于计算机设备可以根据口腔扫描档案确定牙齿的初始形态，并执行第一矫正跳转操作，然后判断每个第一矫正形态是否满足矫正目标，若是，则将第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，将第 一矫正子路径作为矫正跳转路径；若否，则返回执行第一矫正跳转操作，直至所确定的矫正形态满足矫正目标，并将满足矫正目标的矫正形态和初始形态之间的跳转路径作为所述矫正跳转路径。其中，第一矫正跳转操作包括：根据矫正步进和初始形态，确定第一矫正子路径，得到每个第一矫正子路经对应的多个第一矫正形态。采用该方法，能够得到符合矫正目标的多个跳转路径，进而能够全面的得到多种可能的牙齿的矫正方式，其矫正的灵活性更高。Specifically, the computer device can determine the tissue distribution of the tooth according to the above oral scan file, including the initial shape of the tooth, and then perform the first correction jump operation, specifically, the computer device is based on the initial shape of the tooth according to a preset correction step , Determine the first corrective sub-path, the first corrective sub-path may be all the sub-paths that can be adjusted according to the corrective step based on the initial shape, and obtain the first corrective shape of the teeth under each first corrective sub-path , And then determine whether each first correction pattern meets the preset correction goals, where the correction goals include SNA, SNB, E-plane, crowding degree, the proximal and distal contact points of teeth and the average dental arch line The distance, teeth bite, etc. all meet the requirements. When the first correction form can meet the correction target, the first correction form is determined as the target correction form, and the first correction sub-path is used as the correction jump path; when the first correction form does not meet the correction target, then Take the first corrected form as the new initial form, and return to perform the above-mentioned first corrected jump operation, and then iteratively execute until the determined corrected form meets the corrected goal, and the corrected form and The jump path between the first initial forms is used as the corrected jump path. It should be noted that there may be multiple corrected jump paths. Optionally, the computer device may also set a threshold for the number of iterations. When the number of iterations of the first corrected jump operation exceeds the threshold for the number of iterations, it is confirmed that the path cost is too high, so the path is abandoned and the jump is stopped. In this implementation manner, since the computer device can determine the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file, and perform the first correction jump operation, and then determine whether each first correction shape meets the correction goal, if so, the first correction shape is determined as Target correction form, use the first correction sub-path as the correction jump path; if not, return to execute the first correction jump operation until the determined correction form meets the correction goal, and the correction form and initial form that meet the correction goal The jump path between them serves as the corrected jump path. The first correction jump operation includes: determining the first correction sub-path according to the correction step and the initial shape, and obtaining a plurality of first correction shapes corresponding to each first correction sub-path. With this method, multiple jump paths that meet the correction goals can be obtained, and thus a variety of possible tooth correction methods can be comprehensively obtained, and the correction flexibility is higher.
可选地，该步骤的一种可能的实现方式可以包括：根据所述口腔扫描档案确定所述牙齿的初始形态；执行第二矫正跳转操作，所述第二矫正跳转操作包括：根据所述初始形态确定第一矫正方向，根据所述矫正步进和所述第一矫正方向确定第一矫正子路径，得到每个所述第一矫正子路径对应的多个第一矫正形态，判断所述第一矫正形态是否满足所述矫正目标；若是，则将所述第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，将所述第一矫正子路径作为所述第二矫正跳转路径；若否，则返回执行所述第二矫正跳转操作，直至所确定的矫正形态满足所述矫正目标，并将满足所述矫正目标的矫正形态和所述初始形态之间的跳转路径作为所述矫正跳转路径。Optionally, a possible implementation manner of this step may include: determining the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file; performing a second correction jump operation, the second correction jump operation including: The initial shape determines a first correction direction, and a first correction sub-path is determined according to the correction step and the first correction direction, to obtain a plurality of first correction shapes corresponding to each of the first correction sub-paths, and determine Whether the first correction form satisfies the correction target; if yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form, and use the first correction sub-path as the second correction jump path; if not, then Return to perform the second correction jump operation until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and use the jump path between the correction form that meets the correction target and the initial form as the correction jump path.
具体的，计算机设备可以根据上述口腔扫描档案确定出牙齿的组织分布，包括牙齿的初始形态，然后执行第二矫正跳转操作，具体为，计算机设备根据预设的矫正步进基于牙齿的初始形态，首先确定第一矫正方向，该第一矫正方向可以包括多个矫正分支方向，例如在牙齿唇侧错位时，其第一矫正方向可以包括颚侧矫正分支方向、前牙方向矫正分支方向，后牙方向矫正分支方向等，还可以包括其他非唇侧方向的矫正分支方向，然后根据多个矫正分支方向和预设的矫正步进确定第一矫正子路径，进而得到每个第一矫正子路径下的牙齿的第一矫正形态，该第一矫正子路径则可以包括多个矫正分支方向的子路径。关于矫正步进非描述可以参见前文所述。然后计算机设备判断每个第一矫正形态是否满足预设的矫正目标，其中，该矫正目标包括SNA、SNB、E-plane、拥挤程度、牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离、牙齿咬合等均满足要求。当上述第一矫正形态能够满足矫正目标时，则将第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，并将第一矫正子路径作为矫正跳转路径；当上述第一矫正形态不满足矫正目标时，则将第一矫正形态作为新的初始形态，并返回执行上述第二矫正跳转操作，依此迭代执行，直至所确定的矫正形态满足所述矫正目标，并将满足所述矫正目标的矫正形态和第一个初始形态之间的跳转路径作为矫正跳转路径。需要说明的是，所得到的矫正跳转路径可能为多条。可选地，计算机设备还可以设置迭代次数阈值，当上述第二矫正跳转操作的迭代次数超过该迭代次数阈值时，则确认该路径代价过大，因此放弃该条路径，即停止跳转。本实现方式，由于计算机设备可以根据口腔扫描档案确定牙齿的初始形态，并执行第二矫正跳转操作，然后判断每个第一矫正形态是否满足矫正目标，若是，则将第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，将第一矫正子路径作为矫正跳转路径；若否，则返回执行第二矫正跳转操作，直至所确定的矫正形态满足矫正目标，并将满足矫正目标的矫正形态和初始形态之间的跳转路径作为所述矫正跳转路径。其中，第二矫正跳转操作包括：根据初始形态确定第一矫正方向，根据矫正步进和第一矫正方向，确定第一矫正子路径，得到每个第一矫正子路经对应的多个第一矫正形态。采用该方法，能够得到符合矫正目标的多个跳转路径，进而能够全面的得到多种可能的牙齿的矫正方式，其矫正的灵活性更高。Specifically, the computer device can determine the tissue distribution of the tooth according to the above oral scan file, including the initial shape of the tooth, and then perform a second correction jump operation, specifically, the computer device is based on the initial shape of the tooth according to a preset correction step , First determine the first correction direction, the first correction direction may include multiple correction branch directions, for example, when the lips are misaligned, the first correction direction may include the jaw side correction branch direction, the front teeth direction correction branch direction, after Dental direction correction branch direction, etc., may also include other non-lip side correction branch directions, and then determine the first correction sub-path according to multiple correction branch directions and preset correction steps, and then obtain each first correction sub-path The first correction form of the lower tooth, the first correction sub-path may include multiple sub-paths in the correction branch direction. For the description of the correction step, please refer to the previous description. The computer device then determines whether each first correction pattern meets the preset correction goals, where the correction goals include SNA, SNB, E-plane, crowding degree, proximal and distal contact points of teeth and average dental arch The distance of the line, the teeth bite, etc. all meet the requirements. When the first correction form can meet the correction target, the first correction form is determined as the target correction form, and the first correction sub-path is used as the correction jump path; when the first correction form does not meet the correction target, then Take the first corrected form as the new initial form, and return to perform the above-mentioned second corrected jump operation, and iteratively execute until the determined corrected form meets the corrected target, and the corrected form and The jump path between the first initial forms is used as the corrected jump path. It should be noted that there may be multiple corrected jump paths. Optionally, the computer device may also set a threshold for the number of iterations. When the number of iterations of the second corrected jump operation exceeds the threshold for the number of iterations, it is confirmed that the path cost is too high, so the path is abandoned and the jump is stopped. In this implementation manner, since the computer device can determine the initial shape of the tooth based on the oral scan file, and perform the second correction jump operation, and then determine whether each first correction shape meets the correction goal, if so, the first correction shape is determined as Target correction form, use the first correction sub-path as the correction jump path; if not, return to perform the second correction jump operation until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and the correction form and initial form that meet the correction target The jump path between them serves as the corrected jump path. The second correction jump operation includes: determining the first correction direction according to the initial shape, determining the first correction sub-path according to the correction step and the first correction direction, and obtaining multiple first corresponding sub-paths for each first correction Correct the shape. With this method, multiple jump paths that meet the correction goals can be obtained, and thus a variety of possible tooth correction methods can be comprehensively obtained, and the correction flexibility is higher.
S902、按照预设的评价模型从所述多个矫正跳转路径中确定目标矫正路径。S902. Determine a target correction path from the plurality of correction jump paths according to a preset evaluation model.
具体的，计算机设备可以按照预设的评价模型将每个矫正跳转路径进行评价，得到其量化的评价指标，并根据该量化的评价指标找出符合要求，例如成本最低的或者舒适度最高的矫正跳转路径，作为目标矫正路径。具体的，计算机设备可以通过设置评价模型中的各个指标的权重以确定出符合需要的评价模型，进而确定出符合需要的目标矫正路径。Specifically, the computer device can evaluate each corrective jump path according to a preset evaluation model to obtain its quantitative evaluation index, and find out that it meets the requirements according to the quantitative evaluation index, such as the lowest cost or the highest comfort level Correct the jump path as the target correction path. Specifically, the computer device can determine the evaluation model that meets the need by setting the weight of each index in the evaluation model, and then determine the target correction path that meets the need.
S903、根据所述目标矫正路径上的每个节点的矫正形态确定牙齿矫正器模型。S903. Determine a tooth orthodontic model according to the correction form of each node on the target correction path.
具体的，计算机设备每次根据矫正步进调整，到达矫正跳转路径的节点的时候，均可以得到该节点的矫正器模型的矫正形态，因此计算机设备将目标矫正路径上的每个节点的矫正形态，确定为牙齿矫正器模型中的矫正器模型的形态，从而得到牙齿矫正器模型。Specifically, each time the computer device adjusts according to the correction step and reaches the node of the correction jump path, it can obtain the correction form of the corrector model of the node, so the computer device corrects each node on the target correction path The shape is determined as the shape of the orthodontic model in the orthodontic model, thereby obtaining the orthodontic model.
本实施例中，计算机设备根据预设的矫正步进和口腔扫描档案，确定多个矫正跳转路径，按照预设的评价模型从多个矫正跳转路径中确定目标矫正路径，并根据目标矫正路径上的每个节点的矫正形态确定牙齿矫正器模型。其中，每个矫正跳转路径对应一个目标矫正形态，目标矫正形态满足预设的矫正目标。采用该方法，计算机设备能够结合矫正步进和口腔扫描档案所体现的口腔的实际情况，确定出能够满足矫正 目标的牙齿矫正器模型，并且，由于采用评价模型从多个矫正跳转路径中确定出与使用需求最为匹配的最优路径作为目标矫正路径，进而根据最优的目标矫正路径得到最优的牙齿矫正器模型，其进一步提高了矫正器模型的精确度。In this embodiment, the computer device determines multiple correction jump paths according to the preset correction steps and oral scan files, determines the target correction path from the multiple correction jump paths according to the preset evaluation model, and corrects the target correction according to the target The orthodontic shape of each node on the path determines the orthodontic model. Wherein, each correction jump path corresponds to a target correction form, and the target correction form meets the preset correction target. Using this method, the computer device can determine the dental appliance model that can meet the correction goal by combining the correction step and the actual situation of the oral cavity reflected in the oral scan file, and, since the evaluation model is used to determine from multiple correction jump paths The optimal path that best matches the usage requirements is taken as the target correction path, and then the optimal dental appliance model is obtained according to the optimal target correction path, which further improves the accuracy of the appliance model.
应该理解的是，虽然图2-10的流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的指示依次显示，但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头指示的顺序依次执行。除非本文中有明确的说明，这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制，这些步骤可以以其它的顺序执行。而且，图2-10中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个子步骤或者多个阶段，这些子步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时刻执行完成，而是可以在不同的时刻执行，这些子步骤或者阶段的执行顺序也不必然是依次进行，而是可以与其它步骤或者其它步骤的子步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。It should be understood that although the steps in the flowcharts of FIGS. 2-10 are sequentially displayed according to the arrows, the steps are not necessarily executed in the order indicated by the arrows. Unless clearly stated in this article, the execution of these steps is not strictly limited in order, and these steps can be executed in other orders. Moreover, at least some of the steps in FIGS. 2-10 may include multiple sub-steps or multiple stages. These sub-steps or stages are not necessarily executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times. These sub-steps or stages The execution order of is not necessarily sequential, but may be executed in turn or alternately with at least a part of other steps or sub-steps or stages of other steps.
在一个实施例中，如图11所示，提供了一种牙齿矫正器模型确定装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：获取模块11和第一处理模块12。In one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, a device for determining a dental appliance model is provided, characterized in that the device includes: an acquisition module 11 and a first processing module 12.
具体的，获取模块11，用于获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案。Specifically, the obtaining module 11 is used to obtain an oral scan file of teeth to be corrected.
第一处理模块12，用于根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，并根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息。The first processing module 12 is used to determine the dental correction information according to the oral scan file, and determine the dental orthosis model based on the dental correction information, and the dental correction information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the correction goal.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定口腔组织分布模型；根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine an oral tissue distribution model based on the oral scan file; and determine dental correction information based on the oral tissue distribution model.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于采用预设的口腔组识别模型对所述口腔扫描档案进行识别，得到所述口腔组织分布模型；所述口腔组织识别模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个口腔扫描训练档案和标注口腔组织分布的模型进行训练得到的模型。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to identify the oral scan file using a preset oral group identification model to obtain the oral tissue distribution model; the oral tissue identification model uses depth Learning neural network system, a model obtained by training multiple oral scan training files and models that mark the distribution of oral tissues.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于采用预设的第一矫正模型对所述口腔组织分布模型进行识别，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述第一矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个口腔组织分布模型和所述多个口腔组织分布模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to identify the oral tissue distribution model using a preset first correction model to determine the dental correction information, and the first correction model adopts depth The learned neural network system is a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution models and target dentition models corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution models.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于确定所述待矫正牙齿的矫正方法；所述矫正方法包括上齿槽座角SNA矫正方法、下齿槽座角SNB矫正方法拥挤等级矫正方法和E-plane矫正方法；根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the correction method of the tooth to be corrected; the correction method includes an upper alveolar seat angle SNA correction method and a lower alveolar seat angle SNB correction method. Correction method and E-plane correction method; according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model, determine the tooth correction information.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述矫正规则用于表征牙齿矫正所需要满足的约束条件。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the tooth correction information using preset correction rules according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model, and the correction rules are used to characterize Constraints required for orthodontics.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNA；根据所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNA和预设的SNA阈值，确定所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型；根据所述SNA矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected; according to the initial SNA and the preset of the tooth to be corrected Determine the SNA correction type of the tooth; determine the tooth correction information according to the SNA correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若所述初始SNA大于预设的SNA平均值，且SNA差值大于或等于所述SNA阈值中的第一SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过大，其中，所述SNA差值为所述初始SNA和所述SNA平均值之间的差值；若所述初始SNA大于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述第一SNA阈值、大于或等于所述SNA阈值中的第二SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过大；若所述初始SNA大于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述第二SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过大；若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述SNA阈值中的第三SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过小；若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值大于或等于所述第三SNA阈值、小于所述SNA阈值中的第四SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过小；若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值大于第四SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过小。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to: if the initial SNA is greater than a preset average SNA and the SNA difference is greater than or equal to the first SNA threshold among the SNA thresholds, then the The SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely excessive, wherein the SNA difference is the difference between the initial SNA and the average SNA; if the initial SNA is greater than the average SNA, and the If the SNA difference is less than the first SNA threshold and greater than or equal to the second SNA threshold of the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is generally too large for SNA; if the initial SNA is greater than the average SNA , And the SNA difference is less than the second SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is slightly too large for SNA; if the initial SNA is less than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is less than the The third SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is a little too small for SNA; if the initial SNA is less than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is greater than or equal to the third SNA threshold Is smaller than the fourth SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is generally too small; if the initial SNA is smaller than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is larger than the fourth SNA threshold , Then the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely too small.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过大或SNA严重过小，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的上颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和上颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第一排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息，其中，所述第一排列规则用于表征牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列的约束条件，所述单侧牙弓应有长度为单侧的待排列牙齿的宽度总和，所述单侧牙弓现有长度为单侧的牙弓上能够提供牙齿排列的实际长度；若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过大或SNA一般过小，则确定对所述口腔组织分布模型中的后牙区的第一目标牙 齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过大或SNA少许过小，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to, if the SNA correction type is SNA severely too large or SNA severely too small, according to the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw in the oral tissue distribution model The length and the existing length of the single-sided dental arch of the upper jaw adopt the preset first arrangement rule to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, wherein the first arrangement The rule is used to characterize the constraint condition of teeth arrangement in the oral tissue distribution model, the unilateral dental arch should have a total width of the teeth to be arranged with a length of one side, and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is single The actual length of the tooth arrangement can be provided on the dental arch on the side; if the SNA correction type is generally too large for SNA or too small for SNA, determine the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model Deglaze the adjacent surface and arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, place all teeth in the first arrangement rule according to the first arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; if the SNA correction type is SNA a little too large or SNA a little too small, then all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule To arrange the target correction form.
在一个实施例中，所述第一排列规则包括：将中切牙向接近所述平均SNA值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNA值与所述SNA平均值之间的差值小于所述SNA阈值中的第五SNA阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。In one embodiment, the first arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor closer to the average SNA value until the difference between the SNA value of the moved tooth and the average SNA value is less than The fifth SNA threshold among the SNA thresholds; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane Plane's vertical distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the midline, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line; the distance between the teeth's mesial and far contact points and the average arch line is less than the preset second A distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第一排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中，进行排列得到所述目标矫正形态；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine that the second target tooth is removed if the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and the The first arrangement rule arranges the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; the first constraint condition is that the unilateral dental arch should have a length greater than or equal to the unilateral teeth The current length of the arch, the first difference is the difference between the length of the unilateral dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; if the first constraint condition is met, and the first difference If the value is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed, and all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the first arrangement rule Arrange in a distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; if the first constraint is satisfied Conditions, and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, then all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; if not satisfied The first constraint condition, and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, then arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form, the The first ratio is the ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first If the width ratio threshold is greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; if the first constraint is not satisfied Conditions, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule, The target corrected form is obtained.
在一个实施例中，若所述矫正方法为SNB矫正方法，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNB；根据所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNB和预设的SNB阈值，确定所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型；根据所述SNB矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。In one embodiment, if the correction method is an SNB correction method, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected; The initial SNB and the preset SNB threshold of the tooth to be corrected are used to determine the SNB correction type of the tooth; and the tooth correction information is determined according to the SNB correction type and the oral tissue distribution model.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若所述初始SNB大于预设的SNB平均值，且SNB差值大于或等于所述SNB阈值中的第一SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过大，其中，所述SNB差值为所述初始SNB和所述SNB平均值之间的差值；若所述初始SNB大于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述第一SNB阈值、大于或等于所述SNB阈值中的第二SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过大；若所述初始SNB大于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述第二SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过大；若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述SNB阈值中的第三SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过小；若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值大于或等于所述第三SNB阈值、小于所述SNB阈值中的第四SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过小；若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值大于第四SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过小。In an embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to: if the initial SNB is greater than a preset average value of SNB and the SNB difference is greater than or equal to the first SNB threshold among the SNB thresholds, then the The SNB correction type of the tooth is that SNB is severely too large, wherein the SNB difference is the difference between the initial SNB and the average value of the SNB; if the initial SNB is greater than the average value of the SNB, and the The SNB difference is less than the first SNB threshold and greater than or equal to the second SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, then the SNB correction type of the tooth is generally too large for SNB; if the initial SNB is greater than the average value of the SNB , And the SNB difference is less than the second SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is a little too large for SNB; if the initial SNB is less than the average SNB, and the SNB difference is less than the The third SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB a little too small; if the initial SNB is less than the average value of the SNB, and the SNB difference is greater than or equal to the third SNB threshold Is smaller than the fourth SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is generally too small; if the initial SNB is smaller than the average SNB, and the SNB difference is larger than the fourth SNB threshold , The SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB is too small.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过大或SNB严重过小，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的下颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和下颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第二排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息，其中，所述第二排列规则用于表征牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列的约束条件，所述单侧牙弓应有长度为单侧的待排列牙齿的宽度总和，所述单侧牙弓现有长度为单侧的牙弓上能够提供牙齿排列的实际长度；若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过大或SNB一般过小，则确定对所述口腔组织分布模型中的后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目 标矫正形态；或者，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过大或SNB少许过小，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to use the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw according to the oral tissue distribution model if the SNB correction type is SNB severely too large or SNB severely too small. The length and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw adopt a preset second arrangement rule to arrange all teeth in the oral cavity tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, wherein the second arrangement The rule is used to characterize the constraint condition of teeth arrangement in the oral tissue distribution model, the unilateral dental arch should have a total width of the teeth to be arranged with a length of one side, and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is single The actual length of the tooth arrangement can be provided on the lateral dental arch; if the SNB correction type is generally too large for SNB or generally too small for SNB, determine the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model Deglaze the adjacent surface, and arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, place all the teeth in the second arrangement rule according to the second arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; if the SNB correction type is SNB a little too large or SNB a little too small, then all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule To arrange the target correction form.
在一个实施例中，所述第二排列规则包括：将中切牙向接近所述平均SNB值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNB值与所述SNB平均值之间的差值小于所述SNB阈值中的第五SNB阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。In one embodiment, the second arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNB value until the difference between the SNB value of the moved tooth and the average SNB value is less than The fifth SNB threshold among the SNB thresholds; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane Plane's vertical distance is less than the first distance threshold; according to the midline, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line; the distance between the teeth's mesial and far contact points and the average arch line is less than the preset second A distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第二排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中，进行排列得到所述目标矫正形态；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine that the second target tooth is removed if the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and the The second arrangement rule arranges the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; the first constraint condition is that the unilateral dental arch should have a length greater than or equal to the unilateral tooth The current length of the arch, the first difference is the difference between the length of the unilateral dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; if the first constraint condition is met, and the first difference If the value is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacently, and all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the second arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; if the first constraint is satisfied Conditions, and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, then all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; if not satisfied The first constraint condition, and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, then all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form, the The first ratio is the ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first If the width ratio threshold is greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; if the first constraint is not satisfied Conditions, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule, The target corrected form is obtained.
在一个实施例中，若所述校正方法为拥挤等级矫正方法，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿的拥挤矫正类型；根据所述拥挤矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。In one embodiment, if the correction method is a crowding level correction method, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the type of crowded correction of the teeth according to the oral tissue distribution model; based on the type of crowded correction And the oral tissue distribution model to determine the orthodontic information.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重拥挤；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般拥挤；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许拥挤；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许分开，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般分开；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于第二宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重分开。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically used if the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and the tooth has labial or lateral jaw deviation Position, the type of crowding correction is severe tooth crowding; the first constraint is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is The unilateral dental arch should have a difference between the length and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; if the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first A width threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic tooth, the crowding correction type is general tooth crowding; if the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is less than the second width Threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic teeth, the crowding correction type is a little crowded teeth; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, then The crowding correction type is that the teeth are slightly separated, and the first ratio is the ratio of the near-to-middle width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average value of the near-to-middle width ratio; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied , And the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold and greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, the crowding correction type is that the teeth are generally separated; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first If the ratio is smaller than the second width ratio threshold, the crowding correction type is severely separated teeth.
在一个实施例中，所述牙齿矫正信息包括目标矫正形态，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重拥挤，则去除第二目标牙齿，并按照预设的第三排列规则将其它牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般拥挤，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第三排列规则将所有牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第三排列规则将所有牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许拥挤、牙齿少许分开或牙齿一般分开，则按照所述第三排列规则将所述牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形 态；若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重分开，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第三排列规则将所述牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；其中，所述第三排列规则包括：将唇/颊侧异位牙齿向颚侧移动；将颚侧异位牙齿向唇/颊侧移动；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。In one embodiment, the dental correction information includes a target correction form, and the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to remove the second target tooth if the type of crowded correction is severely crowded, and follow the preset The three-arrangement rule arranges other teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; if the crowding correction type is generally crowded teeth, it is determined to adjoin the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area Deglaze the face and arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, place all teeth in the third arrangement rule according to the third arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; if the crowded correction type is a little crowded teeth, a little teeth separated, or teeth generally separated, then place the teeth in the third order according to the third arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; if the crowded correction type is severely separated teeth, determine the third target tooth as a virtual crown, and according to the third arrangement rule The teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; wherein, the third arrangement rule includes: moving the labial/buccal ectopic teeth to the jaw side; moving the jaw side ectopic The teeth move to the lip/buccal side; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; Moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occludes.
在一个实施例中，若所述矫正方法为E-plane矫正方法，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述头侧位片中的E-plane的位置和嘴唇轮廓；根据所述嘴唇轮廓与所述E-plane的位置，采用预设的第四排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，并确定所述牙齿矫正信息；其中，所述第四排列规则包括：将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。In one embodiment, if the correction method is an E-plane correction method, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the E in the head-side slice according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected -The position of the plane and the contour of the lips; according to the position of the lips and the position of the E-plane, using a preset fourth arrangement rule, arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model and determine the teeth Correction information; wherein, the fourth arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and The vertical distance of the E-plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset The second distance threshold of; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the direction of the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
在一个实施例中，所述牙齿矫正信息包括目标矫正形态，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第四排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，确定按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中，进行排列得到所述目标矫正形态。In one embodiment, the orthodontic information includes a target orthodontic form, and the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to: if the preset first constraint condition is met and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, then Determine to remove the second target tooth, and arrange the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth alignment rule to obtain the target correction form; the first constraint condition is that the unilateral dental arch should Has a length greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, the first difference is the difference between the length of the unilateral dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; A constraint condition, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and according to the fourth Arrangement rules arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, determine that all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the Target correction form; if the first constraint condition is met and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule, Obtain the target corrected shape; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, then all teeth are distributed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule Arrange in to obtain the target correction form, the first ratio is the ratio of the near-distance width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average value of the near-distance width ratio; if the first constraint is not satisfied Conditions, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold and greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, then all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain The target correction form; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, determine the third target tooth as a virtual crown, and according to the fourth arrangement rule will All teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target corrected shape.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根根据所述口腔组织分布模型，按照预设的第五排列规则将所有牙齿进行排列，并将排列后的牙齿的形态作为所述牙齿矫正信息中的目标矫正形态；其中，所述第五排列规则包括：将所述牙齿向接近预设的SNA平均值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNA值与所述SNA平均值之间的差值小于预设的第五SNA阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to arrange all teeth according to the preset fifth arrangement rule based on the oral tissue distribution model, and use the shape of the arranged teeth as the The target correction form in the tooth correction information; wherein the fifth arrangement rule includes: moving the tooth in a direction close to a preset average SNA until the SNA value of the moved tooth is equal to the average SNA The difference between is less than the preset fifth SNA threshold; move the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and The vertical distance of the E-Plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in sequence along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset The second distance threshold of; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone to the direction of the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第五排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；或者，确定按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔 组织分布模型中进行排列，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第五排列规则将所述牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine that the second target tooth is removed if the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and the The fifth arrangement rule arranges the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model; the first constraint condition is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, the The first difference is the difference between the length of the unilateral dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch; if the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width The threshold value is less than the first width threshold value, then it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to each other, and all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule; or , Determine that all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule; if the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, then according to The fifth arrangement rule arranges all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model; if the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, the fifth arrangement rule is followed Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model, the first ratio is the ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average of the near-to-distance width ratio; A first constraint condition, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold and greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, then all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule ; If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and the tooth is placed in accordance with the fifth arrangement rule Arranged in the oral tissue distribution model.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述口腔扫描档案，采用预设的第二矫正模型，确定牙齿矫正信息；所述第二矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个口腔扫描训练档案进行训练得到的模型。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the tooth correction information using a preset second correction model based on the oral scan file; the second correction model is a neural network using deep learning The system is a model obtained by training multiple oral scan training files.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于当所述矫正方法为SNA矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的SNA矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述SNA矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同SNA矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型，所述SNA矫正类型包括，SNA严重过大、SNA一般过大、SNA少许过大、SNA严重少许、SNA一般过小、SNA严重过小。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the tooth correction information by using a preset SNA correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model when the correction method is an SNA correction method. The SNA correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, which is a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNA correction types and the target dentition models corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models. The types of SNA corrections mentioned include SNA severely too large, SNA generally too large, SNA a little too large, SNA a little severe, SNA generally too small, and SNA severely too small.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于当所述矫正方法为SNB矫正方法时，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的SNB矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述SNB矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同SNB矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型，所述SNB矫正类型包括，SNB严重过大、SNB一般过大、SNB少许过大、SNB严重少许、SNB一般过小和SNB严重过小。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the tooth correction information using the preset SNB correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model when the correction method is the SNB correction method, The SNB correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, which is a model obtained by training multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different SNB correction types and target dentition models corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models, The SNB correction types include: SNB is too large, SNB is generally too large, SNB is slightly too large, SNB is slightly too severe, SNB is generally too small, and SNB is too small.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于当若所述矫正方法为拥挤等级矫正方法时，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的拥挤等级矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述拥挤等级矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同拥挤矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型，所述拥挤矫正类型包括，严重拥挤、一般拥挤、少许拥挤、少许分开、一般分开和严重分开。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the teeth according to the oral tissue distribution model and using a preset crowding level correction model if the correction method is a crowding level correction method Correction information, the crowding level correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different crowding correction types and a target dentition model corresponding to the plurality of oral tissue distribution training models In the obtained model, the congestion correction types include severe congestion, general congestion, a little congestion, a little separation, general separation and severe separation.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于当所述矫正方法为E-plane矫正方法时，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的E-plane矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述E-plane矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同E-plane位置的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the correction method using a preset E-plane correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model when the correction method is an E-plane correction method Tooth correction information, the E-plane correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, for multiple oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions and target dentition corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models The model obtained by training the model.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述牙齿矫正信息中的目标矫正形态和预设的矫正步进，确定所述牙齿矫正器模型的数量和每个所述牙齿矫正器模型的形态。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically used to determine the number of the dental braces model and each of the teeth according to the target correction form and the preset correction step in the dental correction information The shape of the appliance model.
在一个实施例中，所述牙齿矫正信息包括牙齿的矫正形态，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据预设的矫正步进和所述口腔扫描档案，确定多个矫正跳转路径，其中，每个所述矫正跳转路径对应一个目标矫正形态，所述目标矫正形态满足预设的矫正目标；按照预设的评价模型从所述多个矫正跳转路径中确定目标矫正路径；根据所述目标矫正路径上的每个节点的矫正形态确定牙齿矫正器模型。In one embodiment, the orthodontic information includes the orthodontic shape of the tooth. The first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine a plurality of orthodontic jump paths based on a preset orthodontic step and the oral scan file, wherein , Each of the correction jump paths corresponds to a target correction form, and the target correction form meets a preset correction target; a target correction path is determined from the plurality of correction jump paths according to a preset evaluation model; The correction form of each node on the target correction path determines the dental brace model.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述口腔扫描档案确定所述牙齿的初始形态；执行第一矫正跳转操作，所述第一矫正跳转操作包括：根据所述矫正步进和所述初始形态，确定第一矫正子路径，得到每个所述第一矫正子路经对应的多个第一矫正形态，并判断每个所述第一矫正形态是否满足所述矫正目标；若是，则将所述第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，将所述第一矫正子路径作为所述第一矫正跳转路径；若否，则返回执行所述第一矫正跳转操作，直至所确定的矫正形态满足所述矫正目标，并将满足所述矫正目标的矫正形态和所述初始形态之间的跳转路径作为所述矫正跳转路径。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file; perform a first correction jump operation, the first correction jump operation includes: The correction step and the initial form, determining a first correction sub-path, obtaining a plurality of first correction forms corresponding to each of the first correction sub-paths, and determining whether each of the first correction forms meets the Correction target; if yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form and use the first correction sub-path as the first correction jump path; if not, return to perform the first correction jump Operate until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and use the jump path between the correction form that satisfies the correction target and the initial form as the correction jump path.
在一个实施例中，第一处理模块12，具体可以用于根据所述口腔扫描档案确定所述牙齿的初始形态；执行第二矫正跳转操作，所述第二矫正跳转操作包括：根据所述初始形态确定第一矫正方向，根据所述矫正步进和所述第一矫正方向确定第一矫正子路径，得到每个所述第一矫正子路径对应的多个第一矫正形态，判断所述第一矫正形态是否满足所述矫正目标；若是，则将所述第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，将所述第一矫正子路径作为所述第二矫正跳转路径；若否，则返回执行所述第二矫正处理操作，直至所确定的矫正形态满足所述矫正目标，并将满足所述矫正目标的矫正形态和所述初始形态之间的跳转路径作为所述第二矫正跳转路径。In one embodiment, the first processing module 12 may be specifically configured to determine the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file; perform a second correction jump operation, the second correction jump operation includes: The initial shape determines a first correction direction, and a first correction sub-path is determined according to the correction step and the first correction direction, to obtain a plurality of first correction shapes corresponding to each of the first correction sub-paths, and determine Whether the first correction form satisfies the correction target; if yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form, and use the first correction sub-path as the second correction jump path; if not, then Return to perform the second correction processing operation until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and use the jump path between the correction form that meets the correction target and the initial form as the second correction jump Turn the path.
在一个实施例中，所述装置还可以包括第二处理模块，第二处理模块具体用于获取用户的外观影像；根据所述牙齿矫正器模型确定用户的牙齿变化信息；根据所述用户的外观影像和所述牙齿变化信息确定所述用户的牙齿矫正效果图。In one embodiment, the device may further include a second processing module, the second processing module is specifically configured to obtain a user's appearance image; determine the user's tooth change information according to the dental appliance model; according to the user's appearance The image and the tooth change information determine a dental correction effect diagram of the user.
关于牙齿矫正器模型确定装置的具体限定可以参见上文中对牙齿矫正器模型确定方法的限定，在此不再赘述。上述牙齿矫正器模型确定装置中的各个模块可全部或部分通过软件、硬件及其组合来实现。上述各模块可以硬件形式内嵌于或独立于计算机设备中的处理器中，也可以以软件形式存储于计算机设备中的存储器中，以便于处理器调用执行以上各个模块对应的操作。For the specific limitation of the device for determining the orthodontic model, please refer to the definition of the method for determining the orthodontic model in the foregoing, which will not be repeated here. Each module in the device for determining an orthodontic appliance model described above may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, or a combination thereof. The above modules may be embedded in the hardware or independent of the processor in the computer device, or may be stored in the memory in the computer device in the form of software, so that the processor can call and execute the operations corresponding to the above modules.
上述实施例提供的牙齿矫正器模型确定其实现原理和技术效果与上述方法实施例类似，在此不再赘述。The dental appliance model provided by the above embodiment determines that its implementation principle and technical effect are similar to the above method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
在一个实施例中，提供了一种计算机设备，包括存储器和处理器，存储器中存储有计算机程序，该处理器执行计算机程序时实现上述任一实施例的方法中的步骤。具体地，处理器执行上述计算机程序时实现如下步骤：In one embodiment, a computer device is provided, which includes a memory and a processor. A computer program is stored in the memory, and when the processor executes the computer program, the steps in the method in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented. Specifically, the processor implements the following steps when executing the above computer program:
获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；Obtain oral scan files of teeth to be corrected;
根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息；According to the oral scan file, determine the orthodontic information, the orthodontic information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the orthodontic goal;
根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型。Based on the orthodontic information, the orthodontic model is determined.
应当清楚的是，本申请实施例中处理器执行计算机程序的过程，与上述方法中各个步骤的执行过程一致，具体可参见上文中的描述。It should be clear that the process of executing the computer program by the processor in the embodiment of the present application is consistent with the execution process of each step in the above method, for details, please refer to the description above.
上述实施例提供的计算机设备，其实现原理和技术效果与上述方法实施例类似，在此不再赘述。The implementation principle and technical effect of the computer device provided by the foregoing embodiments are similar to the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
在一个实施例中，本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例的方法中的步骤。具体地，计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如下步骤：In an embodiment, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps in the method of any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented. Specifically, when the computer program is executed by the processor, the following steps are implemented:
获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；Obtain oral scan files of teeth to be corrected;
根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息；According to the oral scan file, determine the orthodontic information, the orthodontic information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the orthodontic goal;
根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型。Based on the orthodontic information, the orthodontic model is determined.
应当清楚的是，本申请实施例中处理器执行计算机程序的过程，与上述方法中各个步骤的执行过程一致，具体可参见上文中的描述。It should be clear that the process of executing the computer program by the processor in the embodiment of the present application is consistent with the execution process of each step in the above method, for details, please refer to the description above.
上述实施例提供的计算机计算机存储介质，其实现原理和技术效果与上述方法实施例类似，在此不再赘述。The computer computer storage medium provided by the above embodiments has similar implementation principles and technical effects to the above method embodiments, and will not be described here.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程，是可以通过计算机程序来指令相关的硬件来完成，所述的计算机程序可存储于一非易失性计算机可读取存储介质中，该计算机程序在执行时，可包括如上述各方法的实施例的流程。其中，本申请所提供的各实施例中所使用的对存储器、存储、数据库或其它介质的任何引用，均可包括非易失性和/或易失性存储器。非易失性存储器可包括只读存储器(ROM)、可编程ROM(PROM)、电可编程ROM(EPROM)、电可擦除可编程ROM(EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可包括随机存取存储器(RAM)或者外部高速缓冲存储器。作为说明而非局限，RAM以多种形式可得，诸如静态RAM(SRAM)、动态RAM(DRAM)、同步DRAM(SDRAM)、双数据率SDRAM(DDRSDRAM)、增强型SDRAM(ESDRAM)、同步链路(Synchlink)DRAM(SLDRAM)、存储器总线(Rambus)直接RAM(RDRAM)、直接存储器总线动态RAM(DRDRAM)、以及存储器总线动态RAM(RDRAM)等。A person of ordinary skill in the art may understand that all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments may be completed by instructing relevant hardware through a computer program, and the computer program may be stored in a non-volatile computer readable storage In the medium, when the computer program is executed, the process of the foregoing method embodiments may be included. Wherein, any reference to the memory, storage, database or other media used in the embodiments provided in this application may include non-volatile and/or volatile memory. Non-volatile memory may include read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), electrically programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), or flash memory. Volatile memory can include random access memory (RAM) or external cache memory. By way of illustration and not limitation, RAM is available in many forms, such as static RAM (SRAM), dynamic RAM (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate SDRAM (DDRSDRAM), enhanced SDRAM (ESDRAM), synchronous chain (Synchlink) DRAM (SLDRAM), memory bus (Rambus) direct RAM (RDRAM), direct memory bus dynamic RAM (DRDRAM), and memory bus dynamic RAM (RDRAM), etc.
以上实施例的各技术特征可以进行任意的组合，为使描述简洁，未对上述实施例中的各个技术特征所有可能的组合都进行描述，然而，只要这些技术特征的组合不存在矛盾，都应当认为是本说明书记载的范围。The technical features of the above embodiments can be arbitrarily combined. To simplify the description, all possible combinations of the technical features in the above embodiments are not described. However, as long as there is no contradiction in the combination of these technical features, they should be It is considered to be within the scope of this description.
以上所述实施例仅表达了本申请的几种实施方式，其描述较为具体和详细，但并不能因此而理解为对发明专利范围的限制。应当指出的是，对于本领域的普通技术人员来说，在不脱离本申请构思的前提下，还可以做出若干变形和改进，这些都属于本申请的保护范围。因此，本申请专利的保护范围应以所附权利要求为准。The above-mentioned embodiments only express several implementations of the present application, and their descriptions are more specific and detailed, but they should not be construed as limiting the scope of the invention patent. It should be pointed out that, for a person of ordinary skill in the art, without departing from the concept of the present application, a number of modifications and improvements can be made, which all fall within the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the patent of this application shall be subject to the appended claims.

Claims (36)

  1. 一种牙齿矫正器模型确定方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：A method for determining a dental appliance model, characterized in that the method includes:
    获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；Obtain oral scan files of teeth to be corrected;
    根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息；According to the oral scan file, determine the orthodontic information, the orthodontic information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the orthodontic goal;
    根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型。Based on the orthodontic information, the orthodontic model is determined.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining of dental correction information according to the oral scan file includes:
    根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定口腔组织分布模型；According to the oral scan file, determine the oral tissue distribution model;
    根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息。According to the oral tissue distribution model, determine the orthodontic information.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定口腔组织分布模型，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining the oral cavity tissue distribution model according to the oral scan file includes:
    采用预设的口腔组识别模型对所述口腔扫描档案进行识别，得到所述口腔组织分布模型；所述口腔组织识别模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个口腔扫描训练档案和标注口腔组织分布的模型进行训练得到的模型。Using a preset oral group identification model to identify the oral scan files to obtain the oral tissue distribution model; the oral tissue identification model is a neural network system that uses deep learning to multiple oral scan training files and mark the oral cavity The model obtained by training the organization distribution model.
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining orthodontic information according to the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    采用预设的第一矫正模型对所述口腔组织分布模型进行识别，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述第一矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个口腔组织分布模型和所述多个口腔组织分布模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型。A preset first correction model is used to identify the oral tissue distribution model to determine the dental correction information. The first correction model is a neural network system using deep learning. For multiple oral tissue distribution models and the A model obtained by training a target dentition model corresponding to multiple oral tissue distribution models.
  5. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining orthodontic information according to the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    确定所述待矫正牙齿的矫正方法；所述矫正方法包括上齿槽座角SNA矫正方法、下齿槽座角SNB矫正方法拥挤等级矫正方法和E-plane矫正方法；Determine the correction method of the tooth to be corrected; the correction method includes the upper alveolar seat angle SNA correction method, the lower alveolar seat angle SNB correction method, the crowding level correction method, and the E-plane correction method;
    根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。According to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model, the tooth correction information is determined.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述矫正方法，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 5, wherein the determining the orthodontic information according to the orthodontic method includes:
    根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述矫正规则用于表征牙齿矫正所需要满足的约束条件。According to the correction method and the oral cavity tissue distribution model, predetermined correction rules are used to determine the tooth correction information, and the correction rules are used to characterize the constraint conditions that need to be met for tooth correction.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述矫正方法为SNA矫正方法，所述根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 6, wherein if the correction method is an SNA correction method, the predetermined correction rule is used to determine the tooth correction according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model Information, including:
    根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNA；Determine the initial SNA of the tooth to be corrected according to the head-side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected;
    根据所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNA和预设的SNA阈值，确定所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型；Determine the SNA correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNA and the preset SNA threshold of the tooth to be corrected;
    根据所述SNA矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。According to the SNA correction type and the oral tissue distribution model, the tooth correction information is determined.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNA和预设的SNA范围阈值，确定所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型，包括：The method according to claim 7, wherein the determining the SNA correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNA and the preset SNA range threshold of the tooth to be corrected includes:
    若所述初始SNA大于预设的SNA平均值，且SNA差值大于或等于所述SNA阈值中的第一SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过大，其中，所述SNA差值为所述初始SNA和所述SNA平均值之间的差值；If the initial SNA is greater than the preset average SNA and the SNA difference is greater than or equal to the first SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely excessive, wherein, the SNA The difference is the difference between the initial SNA and the average SNA;
    若所述初始SNA大于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述第一SNA阈值、大于或等于所述SNA阈值中的第二SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过大；If the initial SNA is greater than the average SNA and the SNA difference is less than the first SNA threshold and greater than or equal to the second SNA threshold of the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA Generally too large
    若所述初始SNA大于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述第二SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过大；If the initial SNA is greater than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is less than the second SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA a little too large;
    若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值小于所述SNA阈值中的第三SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过小；If the initial SNA is less than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is less than the third SNA threshold in the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is that SNA is a little too small;
    若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值大于或等于所述第三SNA阈值、小于所述SNA阈值中的第四SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过小；If the initial SNA is less than the average SNA and the SNA difference is greater than or equal to the third SNA threshold and less than the fourth SNA threshold of the SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA Generally too small
    若所述初始SNA小于所述SNA平均值，且所述SNA差值大于第四SNA阈值，则所述牙齿的SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过小。If the initial SNA is less than the average SNA, and the SNA difference is greater than the fourth SNA threshold, the SNA correction type of the tooth is SNA severely too small.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述牙齿矫正信息包括目标矫正形态，所述根据所述SNA矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 8, wherein the dental correction information includes a target correction form, and the determining the dental correction information according to the SNA correction type and the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA严重过大或SNA严重过小，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的上颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和上颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第一排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息，其中，所述第一排列规则用于表征牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列的约束条件，所述单侧牙弓应有长度为单侧的待排列牙齿的宽度总和，所述单侧牙弓现有长度为单侧的牙弓上能够提供牙齿排列的实际长度；If the SNA correction type is SNA severely too large or SNA severely too small, according to the length of the unilateral dental arch in the oral tissue distribution model and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch of the palate, the preset The first arrangement rule of arranging all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the orthodontic information, wherein the first arrangement rule is used to characterize the arrangement of teeth in the oral tissue distribution model Constraint condition, the unilateral dental arch should have a total width of the teeth to be arranged on one side, and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is the actual length on the unilateral dental arch that can provide the arrangement of teeth;
    若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA一般过大或SNA一般过小，则确定对所述口腔组织分布模型中的后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the SNA correction type is generally too large for SNA or too small for SNA, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and the first arrangement rule is followed Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form;
    若所述SNA矫正类型为SNA少许过大或SNA少许过小，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the SNA correction type is SNA a little too large or SNA a little too small, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一排列规则包括：将中切牙向接近所述平均SNA值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNA值与所述SNA平均值之间的差值小于所述SNA阈值中的第五SNA阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。The method according to claim 9, wherein the first arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNA value until the SNA value of the moved tooth is equal to the average SNA value The difference between them is less than the fifth SNA threshold in the SNA threshold; move the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour in the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane Direction and the vertical distance from the E-Plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the proximal and distal contact points of the teeth and the average arch line The distance is less than a preset second distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth area toward the posterior tooth area by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occludes.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的上颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和上颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第一排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 10, characterized in that, according to the oral tissue distribution model, the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw should have a length and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch of the upper jaw, using a preset first Arrangement rules, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, including:
    若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第一排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中，进行排列得到所述目标矫正形态；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, it is determined to remove the second target tooth, and the remaining teeth are placed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule , Arrange to obtain the target correction form; the first constraint is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is the unilateral There should be a difference between the length of the dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arranging all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, arranging all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule To obtain the target correction form;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target Correct form
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the first arrangement rule to obtain the target correction In the configuration, the first ratio is a ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to a preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold and greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the first arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model to obtain the target correction form;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第一排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are placed in the first arrangement rule according to the first arrangement rule. Arranged in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form.
  12. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述矫正方法为SNB矫正方法，所述根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 6, wherein if the correction method is an SNB correction method, the predetermined correction rule is used to determine the tooth correction according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model Information, including:
    根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNB；Determine the initial SNB of the tooth to be corrected according to the head side slice corresponding to the tooth to be corrected;
    根据所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNB和预设的SNB阈值，确定所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型；Determine the SNB correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNB and the preset SNB threshold of the tooth to be corrected;
    根据所述SNB矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。According to the SNB correction type and the oral tissue distribution model, the tooth correction information is determined.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述待矫正牙齿的初始SNB和预设的SNB范围阈值，确定所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型，包括：The method according to claim 12, wherein the determining the SNB correction type of the tooth according to the initial SNB and the preset SNB range threshold of the tooth to be corrected includes:
    若所述初始SNB大于预设的SNB平均值，且SNB差值大于或等于所述SNB阈值中的第一SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过大，其中，所述SNB差值为所述初始SNB和所述SNB平均值之间的差值；If the initial SNB is greater than the preset average value of SNB, and the SNB difference is greater than or equal to the first SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB is too large, wherein The difference is the difference between the initial SNB and the average value of the SNB;
    若所述初始SNB大于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述第一SNB阈值、大于或等于所述SNB阈值中的第二SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过大；If the initial SNB is greater than the average value of the SNB, and the SNB difference is less than the first SNB threshold, greater than or equal to the second SNB threshold in the SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB Generally too large
    若所述初始SNB大于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述第二SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过大；If the initial SNB is greater than the average value of the SNB, and the SNB difference is less than the second SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is a little too large for SNB;
    若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值小于所述SNB阈值中的第三SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过小；If the initial SNB is less than the SNB average value, and the SNB difference value is less than the third SNB threshold value in the SNB threshold value, the SNB correction type of the tooth is a little too small for SNB;
    若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值大于或等于所述第三SNB阈值、小于所述SNB阈值中的第四SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过小；If the initial SNB is less than the SNB average value, and the SNB difference is greater than or equal to the third SNB threshold value and less than the fourth SNB threshold value of the SNB threshold value, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB Generally too small
    若所述初始SNB小于所述SNB平均值，且所述SNB差值大于第四SNB阈值，则所述牙齿的SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过小。If the initial SNB is less than the average value of the SNB, and the SNB difference is greater than the fourth SNB threshold, the SNB correction type of the tooth is SNB is too small.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述牙齿矫正信息包括目标矫正形态，所述根据所述SNB矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 13, wherein the dental correction information includes a target correction form, and the determining the dental correction information according to the SNB correction type and the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB严重过大或SNB严重过小，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的下颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和下颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第二排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息，其中，所述第二排列规则用于表征牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列的约束条件，所述单侧牙弓应有长度为单侧的待排列牙齿的宽度总和，所述单侧牙弓现有长度为单侧的牙弓上能够提供牙齿排列的实际长度；If the SNB correction type is SNB severely too large or SNB severely too small, the length of the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch in the oral tissue distribution model should be preset The second arrangement rule is to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, wherein the second arrangement rule is used to characterize the arrangement of teeth in the oral tissue distribution model Constraint condition, the unilateral dental arch should have a total width of the teeth to be arranged on one side, and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch is the actual length on the unilateral dental arch that can provide the arrangement of teeth;
    若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB一般过大或SNB一般过小，则确定对所述口腔组织分布模型中的后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the SNB correction type is generally too large for SNB or generally too small for SNB, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area in the oral tissue distribution model is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and the second arrangement rule Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form;
    若所述SNB矫正类型为SNB少许过大或SNB少许过小，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the SNB correction type is SNB a little too large or SNB a little too small, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二排列规则包括：将中切牙向接近所述平均SNB值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNB值与所述SNB平均值之间的差值小于所述SNB阈值中的第五SNB阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。The method according to claim 14, wherein the second arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor in a direction close to the average SNB value until the SNB value of the moved tooth is equal to the average value of the SNB The difference between them is less than the fifth SNB threshold in the SNB threshold; move the central incisor to the first direction of the lip contour in the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first location of the E-plane Direction and the vertical distance from the E-Plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the proximal and distal contact points of the teeth and the average arch line The distance is less than a preset second distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth area toward the posterior tooth area by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occludes.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔组织分布模型中的下颚的单侧牙弓应有长度和下颚的单侧牙弓现有长度，采用预设的第二排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 15, characterized in that, according to the oral tissue distribution model, the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw should have a length and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch of the lower jaw, and a preset second Arrangement rules, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the dental correction information, including:
    若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第二排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中，进行排列得到所述目标矫正形态；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, it is determined to remove the second target tooth, and the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule , Arrange to obtain the target correction form; the first constraint is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is the unilateral There should be a difference between the length of the dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确 定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all the teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule To obtain the target correction form;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target Correct form
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the second arrangement rule to obtain the target correction In the configuration, the first ratio is a ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to a preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold, greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the second arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model to obtain the target correction form;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第二排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are placed in the second arrangement rule according to the second arrangement rule. Arranged in the oral tissue distribution model to obtain the target correction form.
  17. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述校正方法为拥挤等级矫正方法，所述根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 6, wherein if the correction method is a crowding level correction method, the tooth is determined according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model using preset correction rules Corrective information, including:
    根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿的拥挤矫正类型；According to the oral cavity tissue distribution model, determine the crowding correction type of the teeth;
    根据所述拥挤矫正类型和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息。According to the crowding correction type and the oral tissue distribution model, the tooth correction information is determined.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿的拥挤矫正类型，包括：The method according to claim 17, wherein the determining the type of crowded correction of the teeth according to the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重拥挤；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic tooth, the crowding correction type is severe tooth crowding; the first A constraint condition is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be equal to the length of the unilateral dental arch. There is a difference in length;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般拥挤；If the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic tooth, the crowding correction The type is generally crowded teeth;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，以及牙齿存在唇侧异位或颚侧异位，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许拥挤；If the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, and there is lip ectopic or jaw ectopic teeth, the crowding correction type is a little crowded teeth;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许分开，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, the crowding correction type is that the teeth are slightly separated, and the first ratio is the near-distal and middle width of the single-sided tooth The ratio of the ratio to the preset average value of the width ratio of the near and far distance;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般分开；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold, greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, the crowding correction type is that the teeth are generally separated;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于第二宽度比阈值，则所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重分开。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, the crowding correction type is severely separated teeth.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述牙齿矫正信息包括目标矫正形态，所述根据所述拥挤矫正类型和所述所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 18, wherein the dental correction information includes a target correction form, and the determining the dental correction information according to the crowded correction type and the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重拥挤，则去除第二目标牙齿，并按照预设的第三排列规则将其它牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the type of crowding correction is severely crowded teeth, remove the second target tooth, and arrange other teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the preset third alignment rule to obtain the target correction form;
    若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿一般拥挤，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第三排列规则将所有牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，按照所述第三排列规则将所有牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the crowding correction type is generally crowded teeth, it is determined that the first target teeth in the posterior tooth area are deglazed adjacent to each other, and all teeth are performed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule Arrangement to obtain the target correction form; or, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form;
    若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿少许拥挤、牙齿少许分开或牙齿一般分开，则按照所述第三排列规则将所述牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the type of crowded correction is a little crowded teeth, a little separated teeth, or generally separated teeth, the teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form ;
    若所述拥挤矫正类型为牙齿严重分开，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第三排列规则将所述牙齿在所述所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the type of crowding correction is severely separated teeth, it is determined that a third target tooth is a virtual crown, and the teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the third arrangement rule to obtain the Target correction form;
    其中，所述第三排列规则包括：将唇/颊侧异位牙齿向颚侧移动；将颚侧异位牙齿向唇/颊侧移动；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中 的至少一个。Among them, the third arrangement rule includes: moving the ectopic teeth of the lip/buccal side to the jaw side; moving the ectopic teeth of the jaw side to the lip/buccal side; according to the midline, arranging all the teeth in sequence along the average arch line ; The distance between the mesial and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; move the teeth in the posterior tooth zone towards the posterior tooth zone by the preset debugging distance; At least one of the teeth and the counter teeth.
  20. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述矫正方法为E-plane矫正方法，所述根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的矫正规则，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 6, wherein if the correction method is an E-plane correction method, the predetermined correction rule is used to determine the correction method according to the correction method and the oral tissue distribution model Orthodontics information, including:
    根据所述待矫正牙齿对应的头侧位片确定所述头侧位片中的E-plane的位置和嘴唇轮廓；Determining the position of the E-plane and the contour of the lips in the head-side slices according to the head-side slices corresponding to the teeth to be corrected;
    根据所述嘴唇轮廓与所述E-plane的位置，采用预设的第四排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，并确定所述牙齿矫正信息；According to the contour of the lips and the position of the E-plane, using a preset fourth arrangement rule, arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model, and determine the tooth correction information;
    其中，所述第四排列规则包括：将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。Wherein, the fourth arrangement rule includes: moving the central incisor toward the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is located in the first direction of the E-plane and is in contact with the E-plane The vertical distance of plane is less than the first distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and distal contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second A distance threshold; moving the teeth in the posterior tooth zone toward the posterior tooth zone by a preset debugging distance; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occlusion.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述牙齿矫正信息包括目标矫正形态，所述根据所述嘴唇轮廓与所述E-plane的位置，采用预设的第四排列规则，将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，并确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 20, wherein the dental correction information includes a target correction form, and the preset fourth arrangement rule is adopted according to the contour of the lips and the position of the E-plane, all Teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model, and the orthodontic information is determined, including:
    若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第四排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有长度的差值；If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, it is determined to remove the second target tooth, and the remaining teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule Performing an arrangement to obtain the target correction form; the first constraint condition is that the unilateral dental arch should have a length greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is the unilateral There should be a difference between the length of the dental arch and the existing length of the unilateral dental arch;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；或者，确定按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is satisfied, and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed, and Arranging all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the target correction form; or, determining that all teeth are performed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule Arrange to obtain the target correction form;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the target Correct form
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fourth arrangement rule to obtain the In the target correction form, the first ratio is a ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to a preset average value of the near-to-distance width ratio;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，得到所述目标矫正形态；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold, greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the fourth arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model to obtain the target correction form;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第四排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中，进行排列得到所述目标矫正形态。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and all teeth are placed in the In the oral tissue distribution model, arrangement is performed to obtain the target corrected shape.
  22. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔组织分布模型，确定牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining orthodontic information according to the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    根根据所述口腔组织分布模型，按照预设的第五排列规则将所有牙齿进行排列，并将排列后的牙齿的形态作为所述牙齿矫正信息中的目标矫正形态；Based on the oral tissue distribution model, all teeth are arranged according to a preset fifth arrangement rule, and the shape of the arranged teeth is used as the target correction form in the tooth correction information;
    其中，所述第五排列规则包括：将所述牙齿向接近预设的SNA平均值的方向移动，直至移动后的牙齿的SNA值与所述SNA平均值之间的差值小于预设的第五SNA阈值；将中切牙向嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向移动，直至所述嘴唇轮廓位于所述E-plane的第一方向并且与所述E-Plane的垂直距离小于第一距离阀值；依据中线，将所有牙齿沿平均牙弓线依次进行排列；牙齿的近中接触点和远中接触点与平均牙弓线的距离小于预设的第二距离阈值；将后牙区的牙齿向后牙区方向移动预设的调试距离；每个所述牙齿与对牙咬合中的至少一个。Wherein, the fifth arrangement rule includes: moving the teeth in a direction close to the preset average value of SNA until the difference between the SNA value of the moved tooth and the average value of SNA is less than the preset first Five SNA thresholds; move the central incisor to the lip contour in the first direction of the E-plane until the lip contour is in the first direction of the E-plane and the vertical distance from the E-Plane is less than the first A distance threshold; according to the median line, all teeth are arranged in order along the average arch line; the distance between the proximal and middle contact points of the tooth and the average arch line is less than the preset second distance threshold; the posterior teeth The teeth of the zone move a preset debugging distance in the direction of the posterior zone; at least one of each of the teeth and the counter teeth occludes.
  23. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔组织分布模型，按照预设的第五排列规则将所有牙齿进行排列，包括：The method according to claim 21, wherein arranging all teeth according to a preset fifth arrangement rule according to the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若满足预设的第一约束条件，且第一差值大于或等于第一宽度阈值，则确定去除第二目标牙齿，并按照所述第五排列规则将其余牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；所述第一约束条件为所述单侧牙弓应有长度大于或等于所述单侧牙弓现有长度，所述第一差值为所述单侧牙弓应有长度与所述单侧牙弓现有 长度的差值；If the preset first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the first width threshold, it is determined to remove the second target tooth, and the remaining teeth are placed in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule Arrange; the first constraint is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be greater than or equal to the existing length of the unilateral dental arch, and the first difference is that the length of the unilateral dental arch should be equal to the length Describe the difference in the existing length of the unilateral dental arch;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值大于或等于第二宽度阈值且小于所述第一宽度阈值，则确定对后牙区的第一目标牙齿进行邻面去釉，并按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；或者，确定按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is greater than or equal to the second width threshold and less than the first width threshold, it is determined that the first target tooth in the posterior tooth area is deglazed adjacent to the first target tooth, and Arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule; or, determine to arrange all teeth in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule;
    若满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一差值小于所述第二宽度阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；If the first constraint condition is satisfied and the first difference is less than the second width threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且第一比值大于或等于第一宽度比阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列，所述第一比值为所述单侧牙齿的近远中宽度比与预设的近远中宽度比平均值的比值；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied and the first ratio is greater than or equal to the first width ratio threshold, all teeth are arranged in the oral tissue distribution model according to the fifth arrangement rule, the first ratio Is the ratio of the near-to-distance width ratio of the single tooth to the preset average of the near-to-distance width ratio;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第一宽度比阈值、大于或等于第二宽度比阈值，则按照所述第五排列规则将所有牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列；If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the first width ratio threshold, greater than or equal to the second width ratio threshold, all teeth are placed in the oral tissue according to the fifth arrangement rule Arrange in the distribution model;
    若不满足所述第一约束条件，且所述第一比值小于所述第二宽度比阈值，则确定第三目标牙齿做虚拟牙冠，并按照所述第五排列规则将所述牙齿在所述口腔组织分布模型中进行排列。If the first constraint condition is not satisfied, and the first ratio is less than the second width ratio threshold, it is determined that the third target tooth is a virtual crown, and the tooth is placed in all teeth according to the fifth arrangement rule Arrange in the oral tissue distribution model.
  24. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining of dental correction information according to the oral scan file includes:
    根据所述口腔扫描档案，采用预设的第二矫正模型，确定牙齿矫正信息；所述第二矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个口腔扫描训练档案进行训练得到的模型。According to the oral scan file, a preset second correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information; the second correction model is a neural network system that uses deep learning to train multiple oral scan training files.
  25. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 5, wherein the determining the orthodontic information according to the orthodontic method and the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若所述矫正方法为SNA矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的SNA矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述SNA矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同SNA矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型，所述SNA矫正类型包括，SNA严重过大、SNA一般过大、SNA少许过大、SNA严重少许、SNA一般过小、SNA严重过小。If the correction method is an SNA correction method, the tooth correction information is determined using a preset SNA correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model. The SNA correction model is a neural network system using deep learning. An oral tissue distribution training model with different SNA correction types and a model obtained by training a target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models. The SNA correction types include: SNA is too large, SNA is generally too large, SNA is a little too big, SNA is a little serious, SNA is usually too small, SNA is too small.
  26. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 5, wherein the determining the orthodontic information according to the orthodontic method and the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若所述矫正方法为SNB矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的SNB矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述SNB矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同SNB矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型，所述SNB矫正类型包括，SNB严重过大、SNB一般过大、SNB少许过大、SNB严重少许、SNB一般过小和SNB严重过小。If the correction method is an SNB correction method, the tooth correction information is determined using a preset SNB correction model according to the oral tissue distribution model. The SNB correction model is a neural network system using deep learning. An oral tissue distribution training model with different SNB correction types and a model obtained by training a target dentition model corresponding to the multiple oral tissue distribution training models. The SNB correction types include: SNB is too large, SNB is generally too large, SNB is a little too big, SNB is a little serious, SNB is usually too small, and SNB is too small.
  27. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 5, wherein the determining the orthodontic information according to the orthodontic method and the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若所述矫正方法为拥挤等级矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的拥挤等级矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述拥挤等级矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同拥挤矫正类型的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型，所述拥挤矫正类型包括，严重拥挤、一般拥挤、少许拥挤、少许分开、一般分开和严重分开。If the correction method is a crowding level correction method, then a predetermined crowding level correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the crowding level correction model is a neural network system using deep learning, A model obtained by training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different crowded correction types and a target dentition model corresponding to the plurality of oral tissue distribution training models. The types of crowded correction include severe crowding, general crowding, a little Crowded, slightly separated, generally separated and severely separated.
  28. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述矫正方法和所述口腔组织分布模型，确定所述牙齿矫正信息，包括：The method according to claim 5, wherein the determining the orthodontic information according to the orthodontic method and the oral tissue distribution model includes:
    若所述矫正方法为E-plane矫正方法，则根据所述口腔组织分布模型，采用预设的E-plane矫正模型确定所述牙齿矫正信息，所述E-plane矫正模型为采用深度学习的神经网络***，对多个具有不同E-plane位置的口腔组织分布训练模型和所述多个口腔组织分布训练模型对应的目标齿列模型进行训练得到的模型。If the correction method is an E-plane correction method, then the preset E-plane correction model is used to determine the tooth correction information according to the oral tissue distribution model, and the E-plane correction model is a neural using deep learning The network system is a model obtained by training a plurality of oral tissue distribution training models with different E-plane positions and a target dentition model corresponding to the plurality of oral tissue distribution training models.
  29. 根据权利要求1-28任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-28, wherein the determining the orthodontic model based on the orthodontic information includes:
    根据所述牙齿矫正信息中的目标矫正形态和预设的矫正步进，确定所述牙齿矫正器模型的数量和每个所述牙齿矫正器模型的形态。The number of the orthodontic models and the form of each of the orthodontic models are determined according to the target orthodontic form and the preset orthodontic steps in the orthodontic information.
  30. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述牙齿矫正信息包括牙齿的矫正形态，所述根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型，包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein the orthodontic information includes the orthodontic form of the tooth, the orthodontic information is determined according to the oral scan file, and the orthodontic model is determined based on the orthodontic information ,include:
    根据预设的矫正步进和所述口腔扫描档案，确定多个矫正跳转路径，其中，每个所述矫正跳转路径对应一个目标矫正形态，所述目标矫正形态满足预设的矫正目标；Multiple correction jump paths are determined according to a preset correction step and the oral scan file, wherein each correction jump path corresponds to a target correction shape, and the target correction shape meets the preset correction goal;
    按照预设的评价模型从所述多个矫正跳转路径中确定目标矫正路径；Determine a target correction path from the plurality of correction jump paths according to a preset evaluation model;
    根据所述目标矫正路径上的每个节点的矫正形态确定牙齿矫正器模型。The orthodontic model is determined according to the orthodontic configuration of each node on the target orthodontic path.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据预设的矫正步进和所述口腔扫描档案，确定多个矫正跳转路径，包括：The method according to claim 30, wherein the determining a plurality of correction jump paths according to a preset correction step and the oral scan file includes:
    根据所述口腔扫描档案确定所述牙齿的初始形态；Determine the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file;
    执行第一矫正跳转操作，所述第一矫正跳转操作包括：根据所述矫正步进和所述初始形态，确定第一矫正子路径，得到每个所述第一矫正子路经对应的多个第一矫正形态；，并判断每个所述第一矫正形态是否满足所述矫正目标；Performing a first corrective jump operation, the first corrective jump operation including: determining a first corrective sub-path according to the corrective step and the initial shape, and obtaining a corresponding number of each first corrective sub-path A first correction form; and determine whether each of the first correction forms meets the correction goal;
    若是，则将所述第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，将所述第一矫正子路径作为所述第一矫正跳转路径；If yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form, and use the first correction sub-path as the first correction jump path;
    若否，则返回执行所述第一矫正跳转操作，直至所确定的矫正形态满足所述矫正目标，并将满足所述矫正目标的矫正形态和所述初始形态之间的跳转路径作为所述矫正跳转路径。If not, it returns to perform the first correction jump operation until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and takes the jump path between the correction form satisfying the correction target and the initial form as State the corrective jump path.
  32. 根据权利要求30所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据预设的矫正步进和所述口腔扫描档案，确定多个矫正跳转路径，包括：The method according to claim 30, wherein the determining a plurality of correction jump paths according to a preset correction step and the oral scan file includes:
    根据所述口腔扫描档案确定所述牙齿的初始形态；Determine the initial shape of the tooth according to the oral scan file;
    执行第二矫正跳转操作，所述第二矫正跳转操作包括：根据所述初始形态确定第一矫正方向，根据所述矫正步进和所述第一矫正方向确定第一矫正子路径，得到每个所述第一矫正子路径对应的多个第一矫正形态，判断所述第一矫正形态是否满足所述矫正目标；Performing a second correction jump operation, where the second correction jump operation includes: determining a first correction direction according to the initial shape, and determining a first correction sub-path according to the correction step and the first correction direction, to obtain Multiple first correction forms corresponding to each of the first correction sub-paths, to determine whether the first correction form meets the correction goal;
    若是，则将所述第一矫正形态确定为目标矫正形态，将所述第一矫正子路径作为所述第二矫正跳转路径；If yes, determine the first correction form as the target correction form, and use the first correction sub-path as the second correction jump path;
    若否，则返回执行所述第二矫正处理操作，直至所确定的矫正形态满足所述矫正目标，并将满足所述矫正目标的矫正形态和所述初始形态之间的跳转路径作为所述第二矫正跳转路径。If not, return to perform the second correction processing operation until the determined correction form meets the correction target, and use the jump path between the correction form that meets the correction target and the initial form as the The second corrects the jump path.
  33. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    获取用户的外观影像；Obtain the user's appearance image;
    根据所述牙齿矫正器模型确定用户的牙齿变化信息；Determine the user's tooth change information according to the dental appliance model;
    根据所述用户的外观影像和所述牙齿变化信息确定所述用户的牙齿矫正效果图。According to the user's appearance image and the tooth change information, determine the user's dental correction effect map.
  34. 一种牙齿矫正器模型确定装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：获取模块和第一处理模块；An apparatus for determining a dental appliance model, characterized in that the apparatus includes: an acquisition module and a first processing module;
    所述获取模块，用于获取待矫正牙齿的口腔扫描档案；The acquisition module is used to acquire oral scan files of teeth to be corrected;
    所述第一处理模块，用于根据所述口腔扫描档案，确定牙齿矫正信息，并根据所述牙齿矫正信息，确定牙齿矫正器模型，所述牙齿矫正信息用于表征牙齿满足矫正目标的信息。The first processing module is configured to determine dental correction information based on the oral scan file, and determine a dental appliance model based on the dental correction information, and the dental correction information is used to characterize the information that the tooth meets the correction goal.
  35. 一种计算机设备，包括存储器和处理器，所述存储器存储有计算机程序，其特征在于，所述处理器执行所述计算机程序时实现权利要求1至33中任一项所述方法的步骤。A computer device includes a memory and a processor, and the memory stores a computer program, wherein when the processor executes the computer program, the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1 to 33 are implemented.
  36. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，其特征在于，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现权利要求1至33中任一项所述的方法的步骤。A computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, characterized in that, when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1 to 33 are implemented.
PCT/CN2019/118954 2018-11-30 2019-11-15 Dental braces model determination method and apparatus, computer device and storage medium WO2020108331A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201811458212.9 2018-11-30
CN201811458212.9A CN111260770B (en) 2018-11-30 2018-11-30 Dental appliance model determination method, device, computer equipment and storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020108331A1 true WO2020108331A1 (en) 2020-06-04

Family

ID=70852446

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/118954 WO2020108331A1 (en) 2018-11-30 2019-11-15 Dental braces model determination method and apparatus, computer device and storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111260770B (en)
WO (1) WO2020108331A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115192226B (en) * 2022-07-05 2023-09-01 北京缔佳医疗器械有限公司 Orthodontic element installation strategy selection method, orthodontic element installation strategy selection device, orthodontic element installation strategy selection equipment and storage medium

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN2537363Y (en) * 2001-10-31 2003-02-26 华中科技大学同济医学院附属同济医院 Functional jaw bone corrector
CN105596094A (en) * 2016-02-01 2016-05-25 北京正齐口腔医疗技术有限公司 Method and device for generating indirect orthodontic adhesive transfer tray three-dimensional digital model
CN107260335A (en) * 2017-06-26 2017-10-20 达理 A kind of lopsided mechanized classification of the denture based on artificial intelligence and design method

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB0707454D0 (en) * 2007-04-18 2007-05-23 Materialise Dental Nv Computer-assisted creation of a custom tooth set-up using facial analysis

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN2537363Y (en) * 2001-10-31 2003-02-26 华中科技大学同济医学院附属同济医院 Functional jaw bone corrector
CN105596094A (en) * 2016-02-01 2016-05-25 北京正齐口腔医疗技术有限公司 Method and device for generating indirect orthodontic adhesive transfer tray three-dimensional digital model
CN107260335A (en) * 2017-06-26 2017-10-20 达理 A kind of lopsided mechanized classification of the denture based on artificial intelligence and design method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111260770B (en) 2024-02-09
CN111260770A (en) 2020-06-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11596499B2 (en) Dental appliance with cavity for an unerupted or erupting tooth
US20210369414A1 (en) Buccal corridor assessment and computation
US11382720B2 (en) Correcting digital treatment plans with image data of a dental condition
US20200268484A1 (en) Interproximal reduction planning
US9411910B2 (en) Dental analysis method and system
US11151802B2 (en) Method and system for providing a face adjustment image
CN106137414B (en) Method and system for determining target dentition layout
CN110025387B (en) Automatic generation method of digital dental ideal model
JP6757671B2 (en) Virtual secondary processing method for gingival model
RU2447838C2 (en) Method for choosing orthodontic approach
US20210022832A1 (en) Systems and methods for orthodontic decision support
CN111105458A (en) Oral implant positioning method, oral tissue identification model establishing method, device, equipment and storage medium
CN113907903A (en) Design method for implant position in edentulous area by using artificial intelligence technology
TWI581770B (en) Dental correction assessment system
WO2020108331A1 (en) Dental braces model determination method and apparatus, computer device and storage medium
CN111028251A (en) Dental picture cutting method, system, equipment and storage medium
Nguyen et al. The decision-making process in orthodontics
KR102347493B1 (en) Method for tooth arrangement design and apparatus thereof
KR102360097B1 (en) Automatic tooth set-up method and guide design device for implant surgery to perform the same
WO2023216954A1 (en) Method for generating digital data set for representing target teeth layout
Maddux The correlation of chin prominence and esthetics
KR20220067095A (en) Method for tooth arrangement design and apparatus thereof
KR20220115661A (en) Method for fabricating digital denture and apparatus thereof
CN115474903A (en) Oral appliance and information generation method, forming method, system and storage medium thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19891461

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A DATED 09.09.2021)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19891461

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1